HP (Hewlett-Packard) CC490A All in One Printer User manual

Remove the left cover

Open the front-door assembly.

Remove four screws.

Figure 2-39 Remove the left cover (1 of 2)

Slide the left cover toward the rear of the product, and then remove.

Figure 2-40 Remove the left cover (2 of 2)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 99

Front-top cover

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Remove the front-top cover

Open the front-door assembly.

Remove three screws.

Figure 2-41 Remove the front-top cover (1 of 3)

Flex the back left corner of the cover and lift to release the pin.

Figure 2-42 Remove the front-top cover (2 of 3)

100 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove the cover.

Figure 2-43 Remove the front-top cover (3 of 3)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 101

Rear-top cover

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

Front-top cover. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

Remove the rear-top cover

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-44 Remove the rear-top cover (1 of 2)

Open the right-door assembly.

Release three tabs (callout 1) and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-45 Remove the rear-top cover (2 of 2)

102 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right-front cover

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

●

Reinstall the power button on page 104 to reinstall it.

Remove the right-front cover

NOTE: Be careful. When removing the cover, do not dislodge the power button. If the button is dislodged, see

Open the right-door assembly. Carefully lift the right-front cover to release one pin.

Figure 2-46 Remove the right-front cover (1 of 3)

Figure 2-47 Remove the right-front cover (2 of 3)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 103

Release two tabs, and then remove the right-front cover.

Figure 2-48 Remove the right-front cover (3 of 3)

Reinstall the power button

Snap the power button into the holders on the cover. Make sure that the spring is correctly installed.

Figure 2-49 Reinstall the power button

104 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Control-panel assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

●

Right-front cover. See Right-front cover on page 103

●

Remove the control-panel assembly

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-50 Remove the control-panel assembly (1 of 2)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 105

Disconnect one connector, and then remove the control-panel assembly.

Figure 2-51 Remove the control-panel assembly (2 of 2)

106 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Front-door assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Rear-top cover. See Rear-top cover on page 102

●

●

Right-front cover. See Right-front cover on page 103

Remove the front-door assembly

Open the front-door assembly.

Release the right link arm by pushing the two segments together and then releasing.

Figure 2-52 Remove the front-door assembly (1 of 5)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 107

Squeeze the tab on the left link arm using needle nose pliers to release it from the front door assembly.

NOTE: Hold the link arm firmly when releasing to prevent it from snapping against the front of the product.

Figure 2-53 Remove the front-door assembly (2 of 5)

Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-54 Remove the front-door assembly (3 of 5)

108 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-55 Remove the front-door assembly (4 of 5)

Remove the front-door assembly.

Figure 2-56 Remove the front-door assembly (5 of 5)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 109

Right-rear cover

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

Front-top cover. See

●

Remove the right-rear cover

Open the right-door assembly.

Release one tab.

Figure 2-57 Remove the right-rear cover (1 of 2)

110 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Lift the cover to remove.

Figure 2-58 Remove the right-rear cover (2 of 2)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 111

Rear cover

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Power-supply cover on page 98 ,

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

Pickup roller (Tray 1) on page 87 .

Remove the rear cover

▲ Remove two screws (callout 1), release three tabs (callout 2), and then remove the rear cover

(callout 3).

Figure 2-59 Remove the rear cover

112 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right-door assembly

Open the right-door assembly.

Figure 2-60 Remove the right-door assembly (1 of 9)

Carefully remove the hinge cover (callout 1).

Figure 2-61 Remove the right-door assembly (2 of 9)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 113

Remove three screws.

Figure 2-62 Remove the right-door assembly (3 of 9)

Remove the hinge assembly.

Reinstallation tip When the hinge is reinstalled, make sure that the tab (callout 1) is correctly positioned on the door.

Figure 2-63 Remove the right-door assembly (4 of 9)

114 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Release one pin, and then release the link arm (callout 1).

CAUTION: The link arm is spring loaded. Hold the arm securely (as shown) to prevent the spring from abruptly retracting.

Figure 2-64 Remove the right-door assembly (5 of 9)

Release one tab, and then remove the cover (callout 1).

TIP: Lift up on the secondary transfer assembly to make removing the cover easier.

Figure 2-65 Remove the right-door assembly (6 of 9)

External panels, covers, and doors 115

Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 2-66 Remove the right-door assembly (7 of 9)

Lift two link arms to release.

Figure 2-67 Remove the right-door assembly (8 of 9)

116 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Slide the right-door assembly toward the front of the product and remove.

Figure 2-68 Remove the right-door assembly (9 of 9)

ENWW External panels, covers, and doors 117

Internal assemblies

Cassette feed guide

TIP: If a page is jammed in the product, you might be able to access it by removing this guide.

Open the right-door assembly.

Figure 2-69 Remove the cassette feed guide (1 of 2)

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the cassette feed guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-70 Remove the cassette feed (2 of 2)

118 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement

ENWW

Secondary transfer assembly

The secondary transfer assembly includes the transfer roller.

Open the right-door assembly.

Figure 2-71 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (1 of 3)

Release one tab and carefully remove the stopper.

NOTE: You might have to slightly lift up on the corner of the assembly to release the stopper pin from the hole in the chassis.

Figure 2-72 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (2 of 3)

ENWW Internal assemblies 119

Remove the secondary transfer assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the blue release lever when removing the assembly.

Figure 2-73 Remove the secondary transfer assembly (3 of 3)

Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly

Press and hold the blue release lever when you reinstall the assembly.

Figure 2-74 Reinstall the secondary transfer assembly

120 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Separation pad (Tray 1)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Pickup roller. See

●

Right door assembly. See

Right-door assembly on page 113

Remove the separation pad (Tray 1)

Remove two screws (callout 1) and the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-75 Remove the separation pad (1 of 6)

Remove two screws (callout 1) and separate Tray 1 (callout 2) from the door assembly.

Figure 2-76 Remove the separation pad (2 of 6)

ENWW Internal assemblies 121

Release two tabs (callout 1) and slide the locking cap and sub roller toward the edge of the tray.

Figure 2-77 Remove the separation pad (3 of 6)

Release two tabs (callout 1) and slide the locking cap and sub roller toward the edge of the tray.

CAUTION: Do not damage the flag (callout 2).

Figure 2-78 Remove the separation pad (4 of 6)

122 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Release one tab (callout 1) and slide the pickup-roller holder toward the edge of the tray.

CAUTION: Do not damage the flag (callout 2).

Figure 2-79 Remove the separation pad (5 of 6)

Release one tab (callout 1) and remove the separation pad.

Figure 2-80 Remove the separation pad (6 of 6)

Internal assemblies 123

Registration density (RD) sensor assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See

●

Secondary transfer assembly. See

Remove the RD sensor assembly

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-81 Remove the RD sensor assembly (1 of 7)

NOTE: When reinstalling the cover, make sure that the tabs are seated correctly.

Figure 2-82 Remove the RD sensor assembly (2 of 7)

124 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Release one tab, and then remove the wire-harness cover.

TIP: Open the front door to make it easier to remove the cover.

Figure 2-83 Remove the RD sensor assembly (3 of 7)

Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 2-84 Remove the RD sensor assembly (4 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 125

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-85 Remove the RD sensor assembly (5 of 7)

Slide the shutter toward the back side of the product. Keep the shutter in this position for the following step.

Figure 2-86 Remove the RD sensor assembly (6 of 7)

126 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Carefully remove the assembly from the product.

CAUTION: Do not damage the shutter as it passes through the chassis.

Figure 2-87 Remove the RD sensor assembly (7 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 127

Registration assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See

●

Secondary transfer assembly. See

reset the registration-roller count and input the media sensor value. See Service menu on page 420 and Service menu on page 420 .

128 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove the registration assembly

NOTE: If a replacement registration assembly is installed, you must use the control-panel menus to

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-88 Remove the registration assembly (1 of 8)

NOTE: When reinstalling the cover, be sure that the tabs are seated correctly.

Figure 2-89 Remove the registration assembly (2 of 8)

ENWW Internal assemblies 129

Release one tab, and then remove the wire-harness cover.

TIP: To make the cover easier to remove, open the front-door assembly to close the RD-sensor shutter.

Figure 2-90 Remove the registration assembly (3 of 8)

Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 2-91 Remove the registration assembly (4 of 8)

130 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the cassette feed guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-92 Remove the registration assembly (5 of 8)

Remove four screws.

Figure 2-93 Remove the registration assembly (6 of 8)

ENWW Internal assemblies 131

Release two pins and the front of the assembly.

Figure 2-94 Remove the registration assembly (7 of 8)

Remove the assembly from the product.

Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the registration assembly, make sure that it is correctly positioned in the product. The tabs on the assembly must fit into the slots in the product chassis and the assembly fits securely up against the product chassis.

Figure 2-95 Remove the registration assembly (8 of 8)

132 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Residual-toner-feed motor

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 92 .

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

Remove the residual-toner-feed motor

Remove one screw (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and them remove the residualtoner-feed motor (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip When the motor (callout 3) is reinstalled, make sure that the keyed shaft on the product and motor component are correctly aligned and engaged.

Figure 2-96 Remove the residual-toner-feed motor

2 3

ENWW Internal assemblies 133

Residual-toner duct and feed assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Toner-collection unit. See

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See

●

Residual-toner-feed motor. See Residual-toner-feed motor on page 133 .

●

Remove the residual-toner duct and feed assembly

Remove one screw.

Figure 2-97 Remove the residual-toner duct and feed assembly (1 of 4)

134 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Release one tab, and then remove the waste toner duct.

Figure 2-98 Remove the residual-toner duct and feed assembly (2 of 4)

Remove one screw.

Figure 2-99 Remove the residual-toner duct and feed assembly (3 of 4)

ENWW Internal assemblies 135

Push the residual-toner feed assembly into the product and then remove through the print cartridge cavity.

CAUTION: The waste toner feed assembly contains toner. Place a cloth below the work area to catch any spilled toner.

Figure 2-100 Remove residual-toner duct and feed assembly (4 of 4)

136 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Cartridge fan and environmental sensor

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Toner-collection unit. See Toner-collection unit on page 76 .

Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2).

Figure 2-101 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (1 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 137

Release one spring.

TIP: Close the front-door assembly to reduce tension in the spring.

Figure 2-102 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (2 of 7)

Release one tab and then slide the fan assembly toward the back of the product.

Figure 2-103 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (3 of 7)

138 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Pull the fan assembly out of the product, and then disconnect two connectors.

TIP: One connector is below the sponge.

Figure 2-104 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (4 of 7)

ENWW

Release two tabs (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-105 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (5 of 7)

Internal assemblies 139

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the fan (callout 2).

Figure 2-106 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (6 of 7)

Carefully release one tab, and then remove the environmental sensor.

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Figure 2-107 Remove the cartridge fan and environmental sensor (7 of 7)

140 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

Remove the toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2).

Figure 2-108 Remove the toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly (1 of 3)

ENWW Internal assemblies 141

Open the front-door assembly, and then remove one screw.

Figure 2-109 Remove the toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly (2 of 3)

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the toner-collection sensor and scannerthermistor assembly (callout 2).

Figure 2-110 Remove the toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly (3 of 3)

142 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Delivery fan

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

●

Remove the delivery fan

Remove one screw (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and release one wire retainer

(callout 3).

Figure 2-111 Remove the delivery fan (1 of 2)

TIP: When the fan is reinstalled, the air must flow into the product. Check the arrows embossed on the fan frame that indicate air flow direction.

ENWW Internal assemblies 143

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the delivery fan (callout 2).

Figure 2-112 Remove the delivery fan (2 of 2)

144 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Delivery assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Fuser. See

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 92 .

●

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

Right-front cover. See Right-front cover on page 103

●

●

Control-panel assembly. See

Control-panel assembly on page 105

●

Delivery fan. See

Delivery fan on page 143

Remove the delivery assembly

Remove one screw (callout 1), and disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then slide the fan duct (callout 3) to release it from the delivery assembly.

NOTE: Do not remove the fan duct from the product.

Figure 2-113 Remove the delivery assembly (1 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 145

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the paper guide (callout 2).

NOTE: Duplex models only: press the duplex solenoid (callout 3) to create enough clearance to remove the paper guide (callout 2).

TIP: The fuser delivery sensor is installed on the rear of the paper guide. Leave the sensor attached to the guide, and rotate the paper guide toward the rear of the product to access the delivery assembly.

Figure 2-114 Remove the delivery assembly (2 of 7)

Release the wire harness from the guides (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout

2).

Figure 2-115 Remove the delivery assembly (3 of 7)

146 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-116 Remove the delivery assembly (4 of 7)

Pull one tab out, and then push the tab down to release the bushing.

Figure 2-117 Remove the delivery assembly (5 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 147

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-118 Remove the delivery assembly (6 of 7)

Remove the assembly.

Figure 2-119 Remove the delivery assembly (7 of 7)

148 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Reinstall the delivery assembly

NOTE: For duplex models, the solenoid plunger must be removed from the discarded assembly, and then installed on the replacement assembly. For all models, the output-bin full sensor must be removed from the discarded assembly, and then installed on the replacement assembly.

Duplex models only : Make sure that the solenoid plunger is correctly installed on the replacement assembly.

Figure 2-120 Reinstall the delivery assembly (1 of 4)

ENWW

For all models : Do the following.

The output-bin full sensor is held in place on the delivery assembly by one tab and two hooks

(callout 1).

Figure 2-121 Reinstall the delivery assembly (2 of 4)

Internal assemblies 149

Hold the delivery assembly with the diverter (callout 1) in the depressed position to move the sensor flag (callout 2) away from the sensor. Release one tab (callout 3).

Figure 2-122 Reinstall the delivery assembly (3 of 4)

2 c.

Slide the sensor up toward the top of the delivery assembly to release two hooks (callout 1), and then carefully remove the sensor from the assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor holder or sensor flag when removing the sensor from the delivery assembly.

Figure 2-123 Reinstall the delivery assembly (4 of 4)

150 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Duplex-drive assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Fuser. See

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 92 .

●

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

Right-front cover. See Right-front cover on page 103

●

●

Control-panel assembly. See

Control-panel assembly on page 105 .

●

Delivery fan. See

Delivery fan on page 143

●

Delivery assembly. See

Delivery assembly on page 145 .

Remove the duplex-drive assembly

▲ Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws (callout 2), and then remove the assembly (callout 3).

Figure 2-124 Remove the duplex-drive assembly

ENWW Internal assemblies 151

Power-supply fan

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Right-rear cover. See

●

Rear cover. See

Remove the power-supply fan

▲ Release two tabs, and then remove the fan from the fan duct.

Reinstallation tip When the fan is reinstalled, the air must flow into the product. Check the arrows embossed on the fan frame that indicate air flow direction.

Figure 2-125 Remove the power-supply fan

152 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Interconnect board (ICB)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

Remove the ICB

WARNING!

Do not remove the ICB from a product and then install it into a different product. Failure to follow this warning will result in severe damage to that product and cause it to be unusable. HP recommends that if you remove and replace the ICB, you should destroy the discarded ICB so that it can not accidentally be installed in a different product.

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and remove the test-button clip (callout 3).

Figure 2-126 Remove the ICB (1 of 2)

ENWW Internal assemblies 153

Carefully rotate and slide the ICB up and away from the chassis, disconnect one connector, and then remove the ICB.

Figure 2-127 Remove the ICB (2 of 2)

154 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

DC controller PCA only

NOTE: Use the following procedure to replace only the DC controller PCA. To access components behind the DC controller, remove the PCA and the sheet-metal backing tray. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

● Interconnect board (ICB). See

DC controller connector locations on page 281 .

Remove the DC controller PCA only

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see

Disconnect all the connectors. There are 32 connectors in all.

Reinstallation tip The connector locations J101, J102, J106, and J154 are not used.

Figure 2-128 Remove the DC controller PCA only (1 of 2)

ENWW Internal assemblies 155

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the DC controller PCA.

Figure 2-129 Remove the DC controller PCA only (2 of 2)

156 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Low-voltage power supply (LVPS)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

DC controller connector locations on page 281 .

NOTE: The formatter cage is attached to the LVPS. Remove both components as an assembly. You can then remove the formatter cage from the LVPS.

Remove the low-voltage power supply

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Remove four screws, and then slide the sheet-metal plate toward the back of the product to remove.

Figure 2-130 Remove the low-voltage power supply (1 of 6)

ENWW Internal assemblies 157

Disconnect five connectors, and then release the wire harnesses from the guides as necessary.

NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see

Figure 2-131 Remove the low-voltage power supply (1 of 6)

Disconnect one connector, and then release the wire harness from the guide.

Reinstallation tip Make sure that you reconnect this connector when the power supply is reinstalled.

Figure 2-132 Remove the low-voltage power supply (2 of 6)

158 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove three screws.

Figure 2-133 Remove the low-voltage power supply (3 of 6)

ENWW

Remove three screws.

Reinstallation tip When the low-voltage power supply is reinstalled, make sure the tab on the mounting bracket behind the bottom screw (callout 1), is inserted in the slot in the product chassis.

When correctly installed, the mounting bracket must be flat against the product chassis.

Figure 2-134 Remove the low-voltage power supply (4 of 6)

Internal assemblies 159

Slide the bottom of the assembly away from the product, tip the top of the assembly away from the product, and then remove the assembly.

Figure 2-135 Remove the low-voltage power supply (5 of 6)

Place the assembly on a flat surface. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then separate the formatter cage (callout 2) from the low-voltage power supply (callout 3).

NOTE: If you are removing the power supply for internal product access, you can leave the formatter cage installed on the power supply chassis.

Figure 2-136 Remove the low-voltage power supply (6 of 6)

160 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

DC controller PCA and tray

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

DC controller connector locations on page 281 .

Remove the DC controller PCA and tray

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

NOTE: To locate DC controller connector locations, see

Disconnect all the connectors. There are 32 connectors in all.

Reinstallation tip The connector locations J101, J102, J106, and J154 are not used.

Figure 2-137 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (1 of 3)

ENWW Internal assemblies 161

Remove two screws.

Figure 2-138 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (2 of 3)

Disengage three tabs (two along the left edge of the PCA and one at the top-right corner of the

PCA).

Figure 2-139 Remove the DC controller PCA and tray (3 of 3)

162 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

Remove the high-voltage power supply lower

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Disconnect three connectors.

Figure 2-140 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (1 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 163

Remove three screws.

Figure 2-141 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (2 of 7)

164 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Release four locking clips.

NOTE: Squeeze each locking clip to remove.

Figure 2-142 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (3 of 7)

Figure 2-143 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (4 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 165

Release five tabs.

Figure 2-144 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (5 of 7)

Rotate the top of the power supply away from the chassis, and then disconnect two connectors on the back of the power supply.

NOTE: Remove the FFC (callout 1) with the high-voltage power supply PCA. Do not disconnect this FFC.

Figure 2-145 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (6 of 7)

166 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Disconnect one FFC (callout 1). Release only the wire harnesses from the guide (callout 2) and then remove the power supply.

NOTE: Remove the FFC (callout 1) and guide (callout 2) with the PCA. Replacement high-voltage power supply PCAs have the FFC and guide installed.

Figure 2-146 Remove the high-voltage power supply lower (7 of 7)

Reinstall the high-voltage power supply lower

When you reinstall the power supply, look through the holes in the PCA and make sure that the highvoltage contact springs are correctly seated against the PCA.

Figure 2-147 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply lower

ENWW Internal assemblies 167

Developing-disengagement motor

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

Remove the developing-disengagement motor

▲ Remove two screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and remove the motor.

Figure 2-148 Remove the developing-disengagement motor

168 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Exhaust fan and fan duct

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

Remove the exhaust fan and fan duct

Remove two screws (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove the exhaust fan and duct (callout 3) from the product.

Figure 2-149 Remove the exhaust fan and fan duct (1 of 3)

ENWW Internal assemblies 169

Release five tabs (callout 1) and remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-150 Remove the exhaust fan and fan duct (2 of 3)

Disconnect one connector, and then remove the fan from the duct.

Figure 2-151 Remove the exhaust fan and fan duct (3 of 3)

170 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Reinstall the exhaust fan and fan duct

Be sure that the toroid (callout 1) is correctly aligned in the FFC cable guide before attempting to reinstall the exhaust fan and duct.

Figure 2-152 Reinstall the exhaust fan and fan duct

ENWW Internal assemblies 171

Pickup motor

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Right-rear cover. See

Power-supply fan. See Power-supply fan on page 152

●

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

Remove the pickup motor

Remove two screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout

3).

Figure 2-153 Remove the pickup motor

172 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Lifter-drive assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 92 .

●

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

Remove the lifter-drive assembly

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then move the accessory-tray connector (callout 2) to access the screw behind it.

Reinstallation tip If the product is installed on the optional paper feeder, you must slightly separate the product and the feeder assembly to install this connector. Open the right door on the feeder. Use the blue handle to release the product-accessory lock, and then lift up on the edge of the product to create a slight gap between the product and the accessory.

Figure 2-154 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (1 of 2)

ENWW Internal assemblies 173

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-155 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (2 of 3)

Remove the lifter-drive assembly from the product.

CAUTION: The spring on the assembly is not captive. Do not lose the spring when the assembly is removed.

Figure 2-156 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (3 of 3)

NOTE: Make sure that the lifter-drive assembly moves up and down easily after reinstalling.

174 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Lifter base assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

Formatter PCA on page 78

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

Right-rear cover. See

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

Remove the lifter base assembly

Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-157 Remove the lifter base assembly (1 of 2)

ENWW Internal assemblies 175

From inside the Tray 2 cavity, remove four screws, and then remove the lifter base assembly.

NOTE: Pull the assembly straight from the product without tipping to prevent the spring from falling from the assembly.

Reinstallation tip If the tray does not completely close when reinstalled, push on the lever in the opening (callout 1) with a flat blade screwdriver to reset the spring in the closing mechanism.

Figure 2-158 Remove the lifter base assembly (2 of 2)

Reinstall the lifter base assembly

If the spring falls from the lifter base assembly, reinstall it in the lifter before reinstalling the lifter base assembly.

Make sure the black rubber end is seated on the spring.

Figure 2-159 Reinstall the lifter base assembly (1 of 2)

176 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Place the spring in the lifter before installing the assembly on the product.

Figure 2-160 Reinstall the lifter base assembly (2 of 2)

ENWW Internal assemblies 177

Tray-pickup drive assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

Right-front cover on page 103

●

Right-front cover. See

●

Rear cover. See

●

Right-rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

Remove the tray-pickup drive assembly

NOTE:

To remove the pickup motor only, see Pickup motor on page 172 .

Release two tabs, and then remove the power-supply fan.

Figure 2-161 Remove the tray-pickup drive assembly (1 of 3)

178 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Remove two screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the pickup motor (callout 35).

Figure 2-162 Remove the tray-pickup drive assembly (2 of 3)

Remove three screws, and then remove the tray-pickup drive assembly.

NOTE: The cams on the main-drive assembly can prevent the tray-pickup drive assembly from releasing from the product. If you cannot remove the assembly, remove the DC controller and tray to provide additional space. See

DC controller PCA and tray on page 161 . You might also need to

remove the wire guide from the main-drive assembly. See Figure 2-198 Remove the main-drive assembly (3 of 6) on page 205 .

Figure 2-163 Remove the tray-pickup drive assembly (3 of 3)

Internal assemblies 179

Tray-pickup assembly

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

●

Secondary transfer assembly. See

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Right-rear cover. See

●

Rear cover. See

Registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 128

●

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

Remove the tray-pickup assembly

NOTE: This task requires that you remove three feed guides on the right side of the product before you can remove the tray-pickup assembly.

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-164 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (1 of 11)

180 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

From the front of the product, remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove one tray rail

(callout 2).

Figure 2-165 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (2 of 11)

From the right side of the product, remove two screws (callout 1) and one cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-166 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (3 of 11)

Internal assemblies 181

Close the right-door assembly. Push in and then push up on the stopper to release.

Figure 2-167 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (4 of 11)

Open the right-door assembly. Lift the two link arms (callout 1) to release from the product, and then remove the paper guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-168 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (5 of 11)

182 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Close the right-door assembly. Push the two tabs toward each other, and then push up to release the feed guide.

Figure 2-169 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (6 of 11)

Open the right-door assembly, and then remove the feed guide.

Figure 2-170 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (7 of 11)

ENWW Internal assemblies 183

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove two brackets (callout 2).

Figure 2-171 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (8 of 11)

Release one tab (callout 1), and then slide the feed guide (callout 2) toward the front of the product to remove.

Figure 2-172 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (9 of 11)

184 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

10.

Remove one screw.

Figure 2-173 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (10 of 11)

11.

Remove the tray-pickup assembly.

Figure 2-174 Remove the tray-pickup assembly (11 of 11)

ENWW Internal assemblies 185

Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Toner collection unit. See

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

Cartridge fan and environmental sensor on page 137 .

●

Cartridge fan and environmental sensor. See

●

Toner collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly. See

Toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly on page 141 .

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

●

Exhaust fan and fan duct. See

Calibrate the product on page 313

186 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M)

NOTE: After installing a new laser/scanner assembly, be sure to calibrate the product. See

Release one spring.

CAUTION: The spring is not captive. Do not lose the spring when it is removed. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to safely retain the spring when it is removed. Do not use a flat blade screwdriver to remove the spring; the spring could forcibly leave the product and strike you.

Figure 2-175 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (1 of 5)

Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-176 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (2 of 5)

ENWW Internal assemblies 187

Release one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect one FFC (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip When reinstalled, the toroid (callout 3) must be correctly positioned on the wire guide (in the provided slots) so that the fan duct will fully seat in the product when it is reinstalled.

Figure 2-177 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (3 of 5)

Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the spring, make sure that the laser/scanner fits tightly up against the product chassis, and make sure that the FFC is fully seated in the connector. The locator tabs on the front and rear of the scanner must be firmly seated in the slots in the chassis.

188 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Rotate the front of the laser/scanner assembly down (callout 1), and then slide it toward the right

(callout 2). Lower the left corner, and then rotate the left corner out of the product (callout 3).

Reinstallation tip When the scanner is reinstalled, make sure that the tab on the front of the laser/scanner is inserted in the alignment hole in the product chassis. See callout 1 in

Figure

2-179 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (5 of 5) on page 189

Figure 2-178 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (4 of 5).

Pull the laser/scanner assembly out of the product to remove it.

Reinstallation tip When the scanner is removed, locate the alignment tab (callout 1) on the front of the laser/scanner. The tab must be inserted in the alignment hole in the product chassis when the assembly is reinstalled.

Figure 2-179 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) (5 of 5)

Internal assemblies 189

Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Toner collection unit. See

●

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

Cartridge fan and environmental sensor on page 137 .

●

Cartridge fan and environmental sensor. See

●

Toner collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly. See

Toner-collection sensor and scanner-thermistor assembly on page 141 .

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

●

High-voltage power supply lower. See

●

Exhaust fan and fan duct. See

Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) on page 186 .

●

Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M). See

190 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk)

NOTE: After installing a new laser/scanner assembly, be sure to calibrate the product. See

Calibrate the product on page 313

Release one spring (callout 1), and then disconnect one FFC (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the spring, make sure that the laser/scanner fits tightly up against the product chassis, and make sure that the FFC is fully seated in the connector. The locator tabs on the front of the scanner must be firmly seated in the slots in the chassis.

Figure 2-180 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (1 of 5)

Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-181 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (2 of 5)

ENWW Internal assemblies 191

Remove five screws (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

CAUTION: Be careful. The PGC actuators are easily dislodged when the cover is removed. See

Figure 2-185 Reinstall the PGC actuators (1 of 5) on page 193 . To reinstall the actuators, see

Reinstall the protective glass cleaner (PGC) actuators on page 193 .

Figure 2-182 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (3 of 5)

Release one spring.

Reinstallation tip When you reinstall the spring, make sure that the laser/scanner fits tightly up against the product chassis.

Figure 2-183 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (4 of 5)

192 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Rotate the corner of the assembly away from the product until you can see the PCA, and then remove the assembly from the product.

Reinstallation tip When the laser/scanner is correctly positioned in the chassis, the plastic parts which protrude at the front and rear of the product will be firmly seated against the locator tabs on the chassis. Verify that the assembly is correctly seated, and then install the spring.

Figure 2-184 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) (5 of 5)

Reinstall the protective glass cleaner (PGC) actuators

The following figure shows a dislodged PGC actuator.

TIP: If the actuator and spring are only slightly dislodged, you might be able to easily push them back into place.

Figure 2-185 Reinstall the PGC actuators (1 of 5)

ENWW Internal assemblies 193

Remove the actuator and spring from the product. Install the spring on the actuator.

Figure 2-186 Reinstall the PGC actuators (2 of 5)

Before proceeding, take note of the following:

● Callout 1 : The pin on the actuator will be installed into the slot in the chassis.

●

Callout 2 : The pin on the pivot arm will be installed into the slot on the actuator.

● Callout 3 : The end of the spring will be installed onto the tab on the chassis.

Figure 2-187 Reinstall the PGC actuators (3 of 5)

194 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Place the end of the actuator into the PGC rod, and then use a small flat blade screw driver to fasten the end of the spring on the tab on the chassis.

Figure 2-188 Reinstall the PGC actuators (4 of 5)

Push down on the actuator to seat it into place. Verify that the actuators is correctly installed. The

PGC actuator must freely move when you push in on the actuator.

Figure 2-189 Reinstall the PGC actuators (5 of 5)

ENWW Internal assemblies 195

High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

DC controller and tray. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 161 .

●

Remove the high-voltage power supply upper

CAUTION: ESD-sensitive part.

Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-190 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (1 of 2)

196 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove three screws (callout 1), release four tabs (callout 2), and then remove the power supply.

Figure 2-191 Remove the high-voltage power supply upper (2 of 2)

ENWW Internal assemblies 197

Reinstall the high-voltage power supply upper

When you reinstall the power supply, look through the holes in the PCA and make sure that the highvoltage contact springs are correctly seated against the PCA.

NOTE: For a replacement power supply, remove one wire harness (callout 1) and then install it on the replacement power supply.

Figure 2-192 Reinstall the high-voltage power supply upper

198 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

●

DC controller PCA and tray. See

High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T) on page 196 .

●

Remove the yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors

▲ For each motor, remove three screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor (callout 3)

Figure 2-193 Remove the yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors

ENWW Internal assemblies 199

Fuser motor

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Formatter. See

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Left cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

●

DC controller PCA. See

High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T) on page 196

●

High-voltage power supply upper. See

200 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Remove the fuser motor

Remove three screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor

(callout 3).

Figure 2-194 Remove the fuser motor

ENWW Internal assemblies 201

ITB motor

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

●

Power-supply cover. See

●

Front-top cover. See

●

●

Left cover. See

●

Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

●

Low-voltage power supply. See

●

DC controller PCA. See

High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T) on page 196

●

High-voltage power supply upper. See

Remove the ITB motor

▲ Remove three screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor

(callout 3).

Figure 2-195 Remove the ITB motor (1 of 2)

202 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Main-drive assembly

NOTE: Removing the main-drive assembly typically requires more than 2 hours to complete.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

● Formatter. See

Intermediate transfer belt (ITB). See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 92 .

●

●

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

● Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

● Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

● Low-voltage power supply. See

● DC controller PCA. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

● High-voltage power supply lower. See

● Exhaust fan and fan duct. See

High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T) on page 196 .

●

●

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors. See Remove the yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

ENWW Internal assemblies 203

Remove the main-drive assembly

Remove eight connectors (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses from the guides

(callout 2).

NOTE: Leave the wire harnesses with the product.

Figure 2-196 Remove the main-drive assembly (1 of 6)

Remove two screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the developing-disengagement motor.

NOTE: When the motor is reinstalled, make sure the motor PCA is positioned at the top of the assembly.

Figure 2-197 Remove the main-drive assembly (2 of 6)

204 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the wire guide from the main-drive assembly

(callout 2).

NOTE: Leave the wire harnesses connected to the wire guide and attached to the product for easier reinstallation.

Figure 2-198 Remove the main-drive assembly (3 of 6)

Remove 10 screws.

Figure 2-199 Remove the main-drive assembly (4 of 6)

Internal assemblies 205

Separate the main-drive assembly from the product.

Figure 2-200 Remove the main-drive assembly (5 of 6)

Release the wire harness (callout 1) from the guides, and then remove the main-drive assembly from the product.

Reinstallation tip It might be easier to pass this harness over the edge of the assembly chassis after the main-drive assembly is reinstalled.

Figure 2-201 Remove the main-drive assembly (6 of 6)

CAUTION: Be careful when you remove the assembly. The cams on the backside of the assembly can be dislodged. If the cams become dislodged, install them on the shafts as shown in

Figure 2-202 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (1 of 7) on page 207 .

The black cam must be installed on the shaft furthest away from the developing-disengagement motor. The white cams are interchangeable.

206 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Reinstall the main-drive assembly

Locate the cams (callout 1) on the back side of the assembly.

Figure 2-202 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (1 of 7)

Slowly rotate the shaft near the black cam.

WARNING!

Do not touch the plastic gears or cams. You must not wipe away any of the grease that is applied to these components. Always rotate the gears and cams by rotating the metal drive shaft.

Figure 2-203 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (2 of 7)

ENWW Internal assemblies 207

Continue to rotate the shaft until the holes in the black-cam gear align as shown below.

When correctly aligned, the bottom-most hole in the gear is aligned with a hole in the sheet-metal chassis.

NOTE: The holes in the other cam gears have a different alignment. You must make sure that the holes in the black-cam gear are correctly aligned.

Figure 2-204 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (3 of 7)

208 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Verify that the cams (callout 1) align correctly.

TIP: The second cam in from the right (the white cam to the left of the black cam), should have the second hole aligned with the hole in the sheet-metal chassis.

The third cam in from the right, should have the third hole aligned with the hole in the sheet-metal chassis.

The fourth cam in from the right (the cam nearest the developing-disengagement motor), should have the fourth hole aligned with the hole in the sheet-metal chassis.

If the second, third, or fourth cams do not correctly align, do the following. Hold the long drive shaft, gently tilt the cam and gear away from the shaft to allow clearance to rotate the gear until the correct hole in the gear aligns with the hole in the chassis.

Figure 2-205 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (4 of 7)

When the cams align correctly, they easily fit into the holes in the chassis.

Figure 2-206 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (5 of 7)

Internal assemblies 209

When placing the assembly on the chassis, align the holes in the assembly with the holes in the chassis.

Reinstallation tip If the upper-left corner of the assembly is difficult to seat, you might need to rotate the ITB motor to align the gear shaft with the hole in the chassis.

Figure 2-207 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (6 of 7)

When the assembly is correctly installed, the tabs are flat against the chassis.

Figure 2-208 Reinstall the main-drive assembly (7 of 7)

TIP: After reassembling the product, use the DIAGNOSTICS menu to print a COLOR BAND

TEST page.

If the test page shows one or more color planes are not printing (usually in the upper left corner of the page), the cam or cams for the missing color plane are not correctly aligned. Repeat the reinstall the main-drive assembly procedure.

210 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Fuser-drive assembly

NOTE: Removing the fuser-drive assembly typically requires more than 2 hours to complete.

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

● Formatter. See

● Fuser. See

Upper-left cover. See Upper-left cover on page 96 .

●

● Power-supply cover. See

●

●

●

● Rear cover. See

●

Interconnect board (ICB). See

● Low-voltage power supply. See

● DC controller PCA. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

● High-voltage power supply lower. See

● Exhaust fan and fan duct. See

High-voltage power supply upper. See High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T) on page 196 .

●

●

Main-drive assembly. See

Main-drive assembly on page 203 .

ENWW Internal assemblies 211

Remove the fuser-drive assembly

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-209 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (1 of 7)

Release the wire harness (callout 1) from the guides.

Figure 2-210 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (2 of 7)

212 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

ENWW

Remove two screws (callout 1), one static wire (callout 2), and one switch (callout 3).

Figure 2-211 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (3 of 7)

Release one tab, and then slide the wire harness holder (callout 1) to release it from the fuser-drive assembly.

NOTE: Releasing the wire harness provides clearance when the assembly is removed. The harness does not need to be removed.

Figure 2-212 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (4 of 7)

Internal assemblies 213

Disconnect two connectors.

Figure 2-213 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (5 of 7)

Remove three screws.

Figure 2-214 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (6 of 7)

214 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Carefully remove the assembly.

Figure 2-215 Remove the fuser-drive assembly (7 of 7)

Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly

Rotate the motor until the gears align, and the assembly is flat against the chassis.

Figure 2-216 Reinstall the fuser-drive assembly

ENWW Internal assemblies 215

Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x

500-sheet)

NOTE:

For information about removing the Tray 3, 4, or 5 feed and separation rollers, see Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86

For information about removing the Tray 3, 4, or 5 cassettes, see Tray on page 84 .

For information about removing the right door (optional paper feeder), see Right door (optional paper feeder) on page 220

The following procedures apply to both the 1 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder and the 3 x 500-sheet optional paper unless specifically noted.

Front door (optional paper feeder)

Release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stopper (callout 2).

Figure 2-217 Remove the front door (optional paper feeder) (1 of 2)

1 2

216 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Release the link arm (callout 1), and then remove the front door (callout 2).

Figure 2-218 Remove the front door (optional paper feeder) (2 of 2)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 217

Rear cover (optional paper feeder)

▲ Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the rear cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-219 Remove the rear cover (optional paper feeder)

218 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Right-front cover (optional paper feeder)

▲ Open the front and right doors, remove one screw (callout 1), and then lift the right-front cover

(callout 2) to remove.

Figure 2-220 Remove the right-front cover (optional paper feeder)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 219

Right door (optional paper feeder)

Open the right door, release one tab (callout 1), and then remove the stopper (callout 2)

Figure 2-221 Remove the right door (optional paper feeder) (1 of 3)

Close the right door slightly, and then release the upper link arm.

Figure 2-222 Remove the right door (optional paper feeder) (2 of 3)

220 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Slide the door to release the lower link arm, and then remove the right door.

Figure 2-223 Remove the right door (optional paper feeder) (3 of 3)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 221

Left cover (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Front door (optional paper feeder). See

Front door (optional paper feeder) on page 216 .

●

Right-front cover (optional paper feeder). See

Right-front cover (optional paper feeder) on page 219 .

Remove the left cover (optional paper feeder)

1 x 500 paper feeder only: Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove two bushings (callout

2).

Figure 2-224 Remove the left cover (optional paper feeder) (1 of 3)

222 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

1 x 500 paper feeder only: Remove three screws (callout 1), and then remove the storage box

(callout 2).

Figure 2-225 Remove the left cover (optional paper feeder) (2 of 3)

Release five tabs (callout 1), and then remove the left cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-226 Remove the left cover (optional paper feeder) (3 of 3)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 223

Right cover (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Right door (optional paper feeder). See

Right door (optional paper feeder) on page 220 .

Remove the right cover (optional paper feeder)

▲ Remove two screws (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then remove the right cover (callout

3).

Figure 2-227 Remove the right cover (optional paper feeder)

224 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Rear-right cover (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Right door (optional paper feeder). See Right door (optional paper feeder) on page 220 .

Remove the rear-right cover (optional paper feeder)

▲ Remove one screw (callout 1), and then lift the rear-right cover (callout 2) to remove.

Figure 2-228 Remove the rear-right cover (optional paper feeder)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 225

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Paper feeder right front cover. See

Right-front cover (optional paper feeder) on page 219

●

Paper feeder rear cover. See

Rear cover (optional paper feeder) on page 218 .

NOTE: The following procedure shows steps for removing the pickup assembly for Tray 3. 3 x 500sheet optional paper feeder only: The steps for removing the pickup assemblies for Tray 4 and Tray

5 are the same unless noted. You must remove the pickup assemblies in sequence beginning with the pickup assembly for Tray 5.

Remove the pickup assembly (optional paper feeder)

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the tray rail (callout 2).

Figure 2-229 Remove the pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) (1 of 5)

226 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

1 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder only: Remove three screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor assembly (callout 3).

Figure 2-230 Remove the pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) (2 of 5)

3 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder only: Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect two connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor assembly (callout 3).

Figure 2-231 Remove the pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) (3 of 5)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 227

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-232 Remove the pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) (4 of 5)

Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the pickup assembly (callout 2).

Figure 2-233 Remove the pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) (5 of 5)

228 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Lifter assembly (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Rear cover (optional paper feeder). See

Rear cover (optional paper feeder) on page 218

Remove the lifter assembly (optional paper feeder)

Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-234 Remove the lifter assembly (optional paper feeder) (1 of 2)

ENWW

Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the lifter assembly (callout 2).

Figure 2-235 Remove the lifter assembly (optional paper feeder) (2 of 2)

Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 229

Lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Rear cover (optional paper feeder). See

Rear cover (optional paper feeder) on page 218 .

Remove the lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder)

Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the wire harnesses (callout 3) from the guides (callout 2).

Figure 2-236 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder) (1 of 2)

Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the sheet-metal plate (callout 2). Remove one spring (callout 3), and then remove the lifter drive assembly.

Figure 2-237 Remove the lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder) (2 of 2)

230 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

Pickup motor assembly (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Rear cover (optional paper feeder). See

Rear cover (optional paper feeder) on page 218

Remove the pickup motor (optional paper feeder) assembly

1 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder only: Remove three screws (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor assembly (callout 3).

Figure 2-238 Remove the pickup motor assembly (optional paper feeder) (1 of 2)

3 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder only: Remove four screws (callout 1), disconnect two connector (callout 2), and then remove the motor assembly (callout 3).

Figure 2-239 Remove the pickup motor assembly (optional paper feeder) (2 of 2)

ENWW Optional paper feeder assemblies (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet) 231

Controller PCA (optional paper feeder)

Before proceeding, remove the following components:

●

Rear cover (optional paper feeder). See

Rear cover (optional paper feeder) on page 218 .

Remove the controller PCA (optional paper feeder)

1 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder only: Disconnect four connector (callout 2), and then remove two screws (callout 1). Release three tabs (callout 3), and then remove the PCA (callout 4).

Figure 2-240 Remove the controller PCA (optional paper feeder) (1 of 2)

3 x 500-sheet optional paper feeder only: Disconnect all connectors, and then remove two screws (callout 1). Release three tabs (callout 2), and then remove the PCA (callout 3).

Figure 2-241 Remove the controller PCA (optional paper feeder) (2 of 2)

232 Chapter 2 Removal and replacement ENWW

3 Solve problems

To use the information in this chapter, you need to have a basic understanding of the HP LaserJet printing process. Explanations of each mechanical assembly, the printer systems, and the basic theory of operation are contained in

Theory of operation on page 1 . Do not perform any of these troubleshooting

processes unless you understand the function of each product component.

●

Solve problems checklist

●

Menu map

●

Troubleshooting process

●

Tools for troubleshooting

●

Clear paper jams

●

Solve paper-handling problems

●

Use manual print modes

●

Solve image-quality problems

●

Clean the product

●

Solve performance problems

●

Solve connectivity problems

●

Service mode functions

●

Product updates

ENWW 233

Solve problems checklist

If the product is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the product does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist.

Make sure that the control-panel display shows one of the following messages: Ready ,

PAUSED , or SLEEP MODE ON . If no lights are illuminated or the display does not say Ready ,

PAUSED , or SLEEP MODE ON , see

Power subsystem on page 240 .

Check the cables.

Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure.

Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.

Check the network connection. See

Solve connectivity problems on page 418

Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications.

Print a configuration page. If the product is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints.

If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media.

If the page jams in the product, see Clear paper jams on page 383 .

If the configuration page prints, check the following items.

If the page prints correctly, the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.

If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware.

Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, see step 7. If no, check the following items:

●

Print the print-quality (PQ) troubleshooting pages. See

Print-quality-troubleshooting pages on page 302 in this chapter.

● Solve the print-quality problems, and then see step 7.

At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline.

Windows : Click Start , click Settings , and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes . Double-click

HP Color LaserJet CP4525 .

-or-

Mac OS X : Open Printer Setup Utility , and then double-click the line for the HP Color LaserJet

CP4525 .

234 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CP4020-CP4520 Series printer driver. Check the program to make sure that you are using the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise

CP4020-CP4520 Series printer driver.

Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, the problem is with the program that you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print) complete these steps: a.

Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.

If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, and select the new connection type that you are using.

ENWW Solve problems checklist 235

Menu map

Print a menu map

Press the OK button to open the menus.

Use the arrow buttons to navigate to the INFORMATION submenu, and then press the OK button.

Use the arrow buttons to navigate to the PRINT MENU MAP submenu, and then press the OK button to print the menu structure.

Press the back arrow to exit the menus.

236 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Troubleshooting process

Determine the problem source

When the product malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the product control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem.

The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition.

Pre-troubleshooting checklist

The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem or problems.

Table 3-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist

Environment

Media

●

Is the product installed on a solid, level surface?

●

Is the product exposed to particle matter or dust?

●

Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source?

●

Is the power supply plug inserted in the product and directly to the wall outlet (not a power strip)?

●

Is the operating environment within the specified parameters, as listed in chapter 1 of this manual?

●

Is the product exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials?

●

Is the product exposed to direct sunlight?

●

Does the customer use only supported media?

● Is the media in good condition (contains no curls, folds, and so forth)?

●

Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits?

ENWW Troubleshooting process 237

Table 3-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued)

Input trays

Print cartridges

ITB and fuser

Covers

Condensation

Miscellaneous

●

Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications?

●

Is the media correctly placed in the tray?

●

Are the paper guides aligned with the stack?

●

Is the paper tray correctly installed in the product?

● Is each print cartridge installed correctly?

●

Are original HP print cartridges installed?

● Are the cartridges damaged?

●

Are the ITB and fuser correctly installed?

●

Is the ITB or fuser damaged?

● Are the right and front doors closed?

●

Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe the affected area dry or leave the product on for

10 to 20 minutes.

●

Was a print cartridge installed soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the product to sit at room temperature for one to two hours.

●

Check for and remove any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the product.

●

Remove the product from the network, and make sure that the failure is with the product before beginning troubleshooting.

●

For any print-quality issues, calibrate the product. See

Calibrate the product on page 313 .

238 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Troubleshooting flowchart

This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve product hardware problems.

Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that more testing is needed. Go to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, go to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart.

Table 3-2 Troubleshooting flowchart

1 Is the product on and does a readable message display?

Power on

Yes No

Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See

Power subsystem on page 240 .

After the control panel display is functional, see step 2.

Control panel messages

Event log

Information pages

Image quality

Interface

Does the message Ready display on the control panel?

Yes No

If an error message displays, see Interpret control-panel messages on page 345

After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3.

Open the DIAGNOSTICS menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this product.

If the event log does not print, see Print an event log on page 376

Does the event log print?

If paper jams inside the product, see

Clear paper jams on page 383

Yes No If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see

Interpret control-panel messages on page 345

Yes

After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, see step 4.

Open the INFORMATION menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all the accessories are installed.

If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it.

After evaluating the configuration pages, see step 5.

Are all the accessories installed?

Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements?

Yes No

Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See

Image defects table on page 410

After the print quality is acceptable, see step 6.

Can the customer print successfully from the host computer?

Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid

IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page.

Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process.

If error messages display on the control panel, see panel messages on page 345 .

Interpret control-

When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process.

ENWW Troubleshooting process 239

Power subsystem

Power-on checks

The basic product functions should start up when the product is plugged into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the product does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

Turn on the product power. If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

During normal operation, the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the product power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the left-side cover, near the formatter. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the product. You can also lean close to the product and hear the fan operating.

You can also place your hand over the hole in the right-rear lower corner. If the fan is operating, you should feel air being drawn into the product. When this fan is operational, the DC side of the power supply is functioning correctly.

After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the right or front cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test (see

Engine-test button on page 244

If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine-test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them.

If the control panel is blank when you turn on the product, check the following items.

Make sure that the product is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that delivers the correct voltage.

Make sure that the power switch is in the on position.

Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected.

Make sure that the formatter is seated and operating correctly. Turn off the product and remove the formatter. Reinstall the formatter, and then verify that the heartbeat LED is flashing.

Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the product on again.

NOTE: If the control panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the product power is turned on, try printing an engine-test page to determine whether the problem is with the control-panel display, formatter, or other product components. See

Engine-test button on page 244 .

Power-on timing (approximate)

● 00.00 seconds; power-button LED illuminates

●

00.10 seconds; control panel backlight illuminates (dim) and engine noises begin

● 00:14 seconds; memory count appears on the control-panel display and fans rotate at high speed

240 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

● 00:36 seconds; HP logo appears on the control-panel display

●

00:60 seconds; engine noises stop (you can run engine test at this point)

● 00:83 seconds; Initializing continues

●

00:85 fans rotate at slow speed

● 00:90 seconds; product enters the Ready state

ENWW Troubleshooting process 241

Tools for troubleshooting

The section describes the tools that can help you solve problems with your device.

Individual component diagnostics

LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot product problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the product is functioning correctly.

Formatter connectivity LED (lit when formatter is correctly seated)

HP Jetdirect LEDs

Heartbeat LED

HP Jetdirect LEDs

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the product control-panel menus.

Press the Home button .

Press the down arrow to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the I/O menu, and then press the OK button.

242 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Press the down arrow to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU option, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the LINK SPEED menu, and then press the OK button.

Select the appropriate link speed, and then press the OK button.

Heartbeat LED

The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the product is initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the product has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off.

Engine diagnostics

This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP Color LaserJet

Enterprise CP4020-CP4520 Series product. The product contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper path, noise, component, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks

Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test when the front and right doors are open. To operate the product with the doors open, the door switch levers must be depressed to simulate a closed-door position.

WARNING!

Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on.

Open the right and front doors.

Insert a folded piece of paper into the right-door switch slot.

Figure 3-1 Diagnostic test (1 of 2)

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 243

Insert a folded piece of paper into each slot at the same time until the product is in a Ready state.

Figure 3-2 Diagnostic test (2 of 2)

Disable cartridge check

Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the product when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged. Consumable supply errors are ignored while the product is in this mode. When the product is in this mode, you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the product. This test can be used isolate problems, such as noise, and to isolate print-quality problems that are related to individual print cartridges.

NOTE: Color cartridges are not keyed and can be interchanged. The black print cartridge is keyed and cannot fit into any other position. An error will display on the control panel if a print cartridge is installed in the wrong position. The SUPPLIES STATUS menu will explain which print cartridge is misplaced.

NOTE: Do not remove or exchange print cartridges and image drums until after you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK , and then press the OK button.

To exit this diagnostic test, press Stop and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS .

Engine-test button

To verify that the product engine is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small pointed object to depress the test-page switch located on the rear of the product. The test page should have a series of

244 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

horizontal lines. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2.

Figure 3-3 Engine-test button

Paper-path test

This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams.

To isolate a problem, specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature:

●

PRINT TEST PAGE . Run the paper-path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test.

● SOURCE . Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional tray.

●

DUPLEX . Enable or disable two-sided printing.

● COPIES . Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight PAPER PATH TEST , and then press the OK button.

Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 245

Manual sensor test (special-mode test)

Use this diagnostic test to manually test the product sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display.

Press the Home button .

Press the down arrow to highlight the DIAGNOSTICS menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the MANUAL SENSOR TEST option, and then press the

OK button.

To exit this diagnostic, press the Stop button , and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS .

Menus cannot be opened during this test, so the OK button serves the same function as the Stop button

Table 3-3 Manual sensor diagnostic tests

Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number

A TOP (top of page) sensor

B loop 1 sensor

C loop 2 sensor

D fuser delivery sensor

E duplex re-pickup sensor

F output bin full sensor

I developer alienation

J fuser pressure-release sensor

K primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor

L media sensor

M front door open

N right door open

SR7

SR9

SR21

SW5

SW6

SR20

SR14

SR15

SR5

SR22

SR6

Not used

SR11

When performing these tests, watch for the corresponding bit to toggle from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1. It can take a few seconds for bits to toggle.

Table 3-4 Default state of bits

Label A B C D

Bit 1 1 1 1

L M

246 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

A TOP (top of page) sensor

Open the right door.

Insert a piece of paper to activate the TOP sensor.

Figure 3-4 Test the TOP sensor (1 of 2)

NOTE: Open the registration shutter to verify the paper activates the sensor.

Figure 3-5 Test the TOP sensor (2 of 2)

ENWW

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace the registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 128 .

Tools for troubleshooting 247

B and C loop sensors

Open the right door.

Lower the secondary transfer assembly.

Slowly insert a piece of paper at the entrance of the fuser to activate the B and C loop sensors underneath the fuser.

Figure 3-6 Test the loop sensors

Check the control-panel display for a sensor response.

If there is no response, replace fuser. See Fuser on page 85 .

248 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

D fuser delivery sensor

Open the right-door assembly.

Lower the secondary transfer assembly.

Remove the fuser, and then verify that the sensor flag on the fuser moves freely. If the sensor flag does not move freely, replace the fuser. See

If there is no response, replace the registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 128 .

Figure 3-7 Test the fuser delivery sensor (1 of 2)

Insert a piece of paper to activate the fuser delivery sensor.

Figure 3-8 Test the fuser delivery sensor (2 of 2)

ENWW

Check the control-panel display for a sensor response.

If there is no response, replace the fuser delivery sensor.

Tools for troubleshooting 249

E duplex re-pickup sensor

Open the right door.

Lift the secondary-transfer assembly.

Press the flag to activate the sensor.

Figure 3-9 Test the duplex re-pickup sensor

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

250 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

F output bin full sensor

NOTE: The front-top, rear-top, and right-front covers have been removed for clarity.

Lift the flapper on the delivery assembly to move the output-bin full sensor flag.

Figure 3-10 Test the output-bin-full sensor

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, remove the right-front cover (see Right-front cover on page 103 ) and verify

that the flag is moving. If not, replace the delivery assembly. See

Delivery assembly on page 145 . If the sensor is malfunctioning, replace the sensor.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 251

I developer alienation

This sensor is located inside the main-drive assembly and cannot be accessed for direct manual testing.

To test this sensor, do the following.

Access the manual-sensor test menu and select sensor test I.

Locate connector J112 on the DC controller PCA.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive component.

Disconnect connector J112. The value shown on the control-panel display changes from “0” to “1” if the sensor is properly functioning.

252 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

J fuser pressure-release sensor

Open the right-door assembly.

Lower the secondary transfer assembly.

Remove the fuser.

Insert a piece of paper to activate the fuser pressure-release sensor.

Figure 3-11 Test the fuser pressure-release sensor

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace fuser pressure-release sensor.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 253

K primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor

NOTE: The front-top, rear-top, and right-front covers have been removed for clarity.

Open the right-door assembly.

Lower the secondary transfer assembly, and then remove the fuser and ITB.

Rotate the gear (callout 1) to move the flag (callout 2). If the flag does not move, replace the ITB.

Figure 3-12 Test the primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor (1 of 4)

Figure 3-13 Test the primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor (2 of 4)

254 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

From inside the ITB cavity, press up on the primary-transfer-roller-disengagement flag to activate the sensor.

Figure 3-14 Test the primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor (3 of 4)

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, remove the rear-top cover (see

Rear-top cover on page 102 ) and verify

that the flag is moving.

Figure 3-15 Test the primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor (4 of 4)

ENWW

If the flag moves correctly, replace the sensor.

Tools for troubleshooting 255

L media sensor

You cannot test this sensor with a manual sensor test. Test using the paper-path sensors test. See

Paper-path sensors test on page 273 .

Figure 3-16 Media sensor

Access the paper-path sensors test.

Print a configuration page.

The media sensor (on the registration assembly) detects the type of media as it passes the sensor.

The control-panel display changes based on the media type.

NOTE: The following are examples only. The value that will display depends on the type of media being used to print the page.

●

3 ; displays if the media type is OHT

●

4 ; displays if the media type is Soft gloss

●

1 ; displays if the media type is HP multipurpose paper

●

D ; displays if the media type is Premium Choice 32lb

256 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

M front-door switch

Open the front-door assembly to disengage the front-door switch.

Figure 3-17 Test the front-door switch

Close the front-door assembly, and then check the control panel on the product for sensor response.

TIP: You can leave the front door open and use a slender blade screw driver or pencil to activate the switch.

If there is no response, replace the front-door switch.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 257

N right-door switch

Open the right-door assembly to disengage the right-door switch.

Figure 3-18 Test the right door switch

Close the right-door assembly, or use your finger to depress the switch flag, and check the control panel on the product for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace the right-door switch.

258 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Manual sensor test 2 (special-mode test)

Use this test to test paper-path sensors and the paper-size switches manually. The following illustrations and table show the locations of these sensors.

Press the Home button .

Press the down arrow to highlight the DIAGNOSTICS menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 option, and then press the

OK button.

Table 3-5 Manual sensor test 2 diagnostic tests

Sensor or switch name Sensor or switch number

O Tray 1 paper present sensor

P Tray 2 paper present sensor

Q Tray 2 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

R Tray 2 paper size switches

S Tray 3 paper present sensor

T Tray 3 feed sensor

U Tray 3 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

V Tray 3 paper size switches

W Tray 4 paper present sensor

X Tray 4 feed sensor

Y Tray 4 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

Z Tray 4 paper size switches a Tray 5 paper present sensor b Tray 5 feed sensor c Tray 5 paper surface 1 and 2 sensor d Tray 5 paper size switches

SR8

SR25

SR23 and SR24

SW4

SR3 (paper feeder)

SR4 (paper feeder)

SR1 and SR2 (paper feeder)

SW2 (paper feeder)

SR6 (paper feeder)

SR7 (paper feeder)

SR5 and SR8 (paper feeder)

SW3 (paper feeder)

SR11 (paper feeder)

SR10 (paper feeder)

SR9 and SR12 (paper feeder)

SW4 (paper feeder)

The following items cannot be tested using the manual sensor test.

5 V laser and 24 V interlock switches SW1 and SW2

Power switch

New ITB sensor

Tray 3, 4, and 5 right door switch

SW3

SR10

SW1 (paper feeder)

To perform these tests, do the following:

● Remove the appropriate tray.

●

Watch for the corresponding bit to toggle from 1 to 0 or 0 to 1. It can take a few seconds for bits to toggle.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 259

Table 3-6 Default state of bits

Label O P Q R S

Bit 1 1 1 1 1

●

Test each switch individually.

1 a

1 b

0 c

1 d

260 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

O Tray 1 paper present sensor

Open Tray 1.

Toggle the Tray 1 paper-present sensor flag.

Figure 3-19 Test the Tray 1 media-present sensor

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace Tray 1.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 261

P Tray 2 paper present sensor

Remove Tray 2.

Toggle the tray 2 paper-present sensor flag.

Figure 3-20 Test the tray 2 paper-present sensor

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace the cassette-pickup assembly. See Tray-pickup assembly on page 180 .

262 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Q Tray 2 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

Remove the tray.

In the tray cavity, press the tray-closed tab to release the flag, and then toggle the flag.

Figure 3-21 Tray 2 paper surface 1 and 2

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace the cassette-pickup assembly. See

Tray-pickup assembly on page 180 .

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 263

R Tray 2 paper size switches

NOTE: These switches also detect cassette presence. If these switches fail, the message TRAY <X>

OPEN could appear on the control-panel display.

Remove the tray. From inside the tray cavity, push any of the three buttons.

Figure 3-22 Test the Tray 2 paper size switches

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If there is no response, replace the lifter assembly. See

Lifter base assembly on page 175 .

264 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

S Tray 3 paper present sensor

See

P Tray 2 paper present sensor on page 262

T Tray 3 feed sensor

Remove the tray.

Insert a piece of paper between the rollers to activate the feed sensor.

TIP: Use stiff paper when performing this test (for example a business card or index card).

Figure 3-23 Test the Tray 3 feed sensor

Check the control-panel display for sensor response.

If no response, replace the cassette-pickup assembly. See

Tray-pickup assembly on page 180

U Tray 3 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

See

Q Tray 2 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors on page 263 .

V Tray 3 paper size switches

See

R Tray 2 paper size switches on page 264

W Tray 4 paper present sensor

See

P Tray 2 paper present sensor on page 262

X Tray 4 feed sensor

See

T Tray 3 feed sensor on page 265 .

Y Tray 4 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

See

Q Tray 2 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors on page 263 .

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 265

Z Tray 4 paper size switches

See

R Tray 2 paper size switches on page 264 .

a Tray 5 paper present sensor

See

P Tray 2 paper present sensor on page 262 .

b Tray 5 feed sensor

See

T Tray 3 feed sensor on page 265

c Tray 5 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors

See

Q Tray 2 paper surface 1 and 2 sensors on page 263 .

d Tray 5 paper size switches

See

R Tray 2 paper size switches on page 264 .

266 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

5V laser and 24V interlock and logic switches (and power switch)

Location and testing

Press the power switch to turn the product off then on to test the switch function.

Remove the right-front cover. See

Right-front cover on page 103 .

Locate the link arms (callout 1) on the front and right doors (and access ports in the covers; callout

2) that actuate the front- and right-door interlock switch (behind the right-front cover).

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 267

Open and close the doors to make sure that the interlock switches are correctly functioning. The following figures show the interlock switch position with the front and right doors open and closed.

Defeating

● Front-door safety switch

◦

Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in) strip, and then wedge the strip into the opening at the front of the product.

268 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

●

Front-door logic switch

◦ Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in) strip with a bend at the end, and insert the strip into the opening at the front of the product.

ENWW

● Right-door safety switch

◦

Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into a 10 mm (.375 in) strip, and then insert the strip into the opening at the right of the product.

Tools for troubleshooting 269

●

Right-door logic switch

◦ Use masking tape to keep the switch flag depressed.

TIP: You might have to use two pieces of tape to overcome the tension return spring on the flag.

270 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

New ITB sensor

NOTE: This sensor cannot be tested, but you can inspect the sensor, actuator, and the flag on the

ITB for damage.

Remove the existing ITB.

Inspect the new ITB sensor. Press the actuator on the sensor toward the cyan print cartridge to verify that the actuator moves.

Figure 3-24 Test the new ITB sensor

ENWW

On the new ITB, locate and inspect the new ITB flag (callout 1).

TIP: The new ITB flag is only present prior to installation. To see the flag on a previously installed

ITB, insert the end of a paperclip in the hole just below the handle (callout 2) and then rotate the

ITB alienation gear (callout 3).

Figure 3-25 Test the new ITB sensor

2 3

Tools for troubleshooting 271

Tray 3, 4, and 5 right door switch

NOTE: There is no manual sensor test for this sensor.

Open the paper feeder right door. Check the control-panel display for the CLOSE LOWER RIGHT

DOOR message. If the message does not display, open the door and inspect the flag for damage

(callout 1).

Insert a piece of paper to activate the sensor. If there is no response, replace the switch.

NOTE: Make sure that the door flag (callout 1) is not damaged or missing.

Figure 3-26 Test the right door switch

272 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Paper-path sensors test

This test displays the status of each paper-path sensor and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the DIAGNOSTICS , menu and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the PAPER PATH SENSORS option, and then press the

OK button.

Select the paper-path test options for the test you want to run.

NOTE: Print an internal page to view sensor activity.

Table 3-7 Paper-path sensors diagnostic tests

Sensor name Sensor number

A TOP (top of page) sensor

B loop 1 sensor

C loop 2 sensor

D fuser delivery sensor

E duplex re-pick up sensor

F output bin full sensor

I developer alienation

J fuser pressure-release sensor

K primary transfer-roller-disengagement sensor

L media sensor

NOTE: The value for this test varies depending on the type of media used for the test. For example, a “1” displays for HP

Multi-purpose paper; a “D” displays for HP Premium Choice

32lb paper.

SR11

SR7

SR9

SR21

SR20

SR14

SR15

SR5

SR22

SR6

Not used

Print/stop test

Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image-formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the product paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 ms. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the product in one of two ways.

●

After the print job is completed press Stop to return to the DIAGNOSTICS menu before the timer times out.

●

After the timer times out, press Stop . Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 273

When the timer trips, the control panel display shows the message PRINTING STOPPED To continue press OK . Pressing Home will print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press Stop first, and then press Menu .

NOTE: Do not try to perform a print/stop test while the product is calibrating, because you be required to power-cycle the product. If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing, activate the door switch.

Component tests

Component test (special-mode test)

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If you select CONTINUOUS from the dropdown menu as the repeat option, the test cycles the component on and off. This process continues for two minutes, and then the test terminates.

NOTE: The front or side door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests. Some tests may require that the ITB and print cartridges be removed. The control panel display prompts you to remove some or all cartridges during certain tests.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight COMPONENT TEST , and then press the OK button.

Select the component test options for the test you want to run.

Table 3-8 Component test details

Component test Motor or solenoid number

TRANSFER MOTORS

Comments

Activates four drum motors and the ITB motor (M1).

BELT ONLY

CARTRIDGE MOTORS

BLACK LASER SCANNER

●

M3: yellow

● M4: magenta

●

M5: cyan

●

M6: black

Activates the ITB motor.

Activates each drum motor sequentially (K, C, M, Y).

CYAN LASER SCANNER

MAGENTA LASER SCANNER

Activates the black/cyan scanner motor for 10 seconds.

Activates the yellow/magenta scanner motor for 10 seconds.

274 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-8 Component test details (continued)

Component test Motor or solenoid number

YELLOW LASER SCANNER M9

FUSER MOTOR M2

FUSER PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR M2 reverse

ALIENATION MOTOR M10

ITB CONTACT ALIENATION MOTOR

TCU MOTOR

SL1

M12

TRAY 1 PICKUP SOLENOID

TRAY 2 PICKUP MOTOR

TRAY 2 PICKUP SOLENOID

TRAY 3 PICKUP MOTOR

SL3

M13

SL4

TRAY 3 PICKUP SOLENOID

TRAY 4 PICKUP MOTOR

TRAY 4 PICKUP SOLENOID

TRAY 5 PICKUP MOTOR

TRAY 5 PICKUP SOLENOID

DUPLEX PICKUP MOTOR

SL1

SL2

SL3

M11: Duplex reverse motor

Comments

Activates the yellow/magenta scanner motor for 10 seconds.

Activate the fuser motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds.

Reverses the fuser motor and pressurizes or depressurizes the fuser.

Activates CMYK developer alienation in the following sequence: All colors engaged, all colors alienated, K-only engaged, and K alienated.

Activates the fuser motor and primary transfer solenoid to cycle through the ITB alienation stages.

Activates the motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds.

Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds.

Activates the pickup motor in reverse for 10 seconds.

Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds.

Activates the motor in the paper-feeder assembly and drives the separation roller for each tray in reverse.

Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds.

Activates the motor in the paper-feeder assembly and drives the separation roller for each tray in reverse.

Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds.

Activates the motor in the paper-feeder assembly and drives the separation roller for each tray in reverse.

Activates the solenoid for 10 seconds.

Activates the motor at a specified speed for 10 seconds.

Tools for troubleshooting 275

Table 3-8 Component test details (continued)

Component test Motor or solenoid number

DUPLEX REFEED CLUTCH SOLENOID SL2: duplex reverse solenoid

REPEAT

Comments

Activates the duplex flapper solenoid for 10 seconds causing the switch-back diverter to move.

Allows you to specify the number of times the product sequences. The choices are

ONCE (default) and

CONTINUOUS . To terminate the test, press STOP

276 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Diagrams

Block diagrams

Figure 3-27 Product cross section

1 2 3 4 5

ENWW

Item

Description

ITB

Primary transfer roller

Duplex flapper (duplex model)

Duplex reverse roller (duplex model)

Pressure roller

Fuser

Fuser sleeve

Duplex feed roller (duplex model)

Secondary transfer roller

ITB drive roller

RD sensor

20 19 18 17 16

Item

Description

Media sensor

Registration shutter

MP tray pickup roller

MP tray separation pad

Registration roller

Cassette separation roller

Cassette feed roller

Cassette pickup roller

Photosensitive drum

Cassette

Laser/scanner assembly

Tools for troubleshooting 277

Figure 3-28 Optional paper feeder (1 x 500-sheet)

Item

Description

Pickup roller

Feed roller

Separation roller

Storage space

Cassette

4 3

278 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-29 Optional paper feeder (3 x 500-sheet)

Item

Description

Pickup roller

Feed roller

Separation roller

Cassette

Tools for troubleshooting 279

Plug/jack locations

Figure 3-30 Formatter PCA

4 1

Hi-speed USB 2.0 printing port

Local area network (LAN) ethernet (RJ-45) network port

EIO interface expansion slot

Slot for a cable-type security lock

Table 3-9 Formatter PCA

Item Description

DIMM slot

Internal hard drive

USB ports

EIO slot

280 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Location of connectors

DC controller connector locations

NOTE: The DC controller has 36 connectors: Five are for FFCs, 27 are for wire harnesses, and four are not used.

Figure 3-31 DC controller connector locations

J123

J130

J145

J131

J148

J147

J108

J107

J140

J127

J162

J160

J128

J129

J106

J113

J121

J116

J154

J120

J155

J101

J102

J152

J103

J105

J151

J112

J126

J153

J115

J114

J110

J111 J150 J161

Table 3-10 DC controller connectors

J101 : not used J115 : SL4, SL23, SL24, SL25, and

HVPS lower

J102 : not used J116 : HVPS upper (FFC)

J103 : laser scanner temperature sensor

(TH4)

J120 : yellow drum motor (M3) and magenta drum motor (M4)

J105 : interconnect board (ICB) J121 : cyan drum motor (M5) and black drum position (M6)

J145 : TOP (top of page) sensor (SR20)

TOP (top of page) sensor (SR20), duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22), and duplex repickup clutch (CL1) (HP Color LaserJet

CP4525dn, HP Color LaserJet

CP4025dn, and HP Color LaserJet

CP4525xh only)

J147 : right-door switch (SW6)

J148 : MP-tray-media-presence sensor

(SR8) and MP-tray pickup solenoid (SL3)

J150 : LVPS

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 281

Table 3-10 DC controller connectors (continued)

J106 : not used J123 : fuser motor (M2) J151 : LVPS

J152 : 5V interlock switch (SW1) J107 : Tray 3, 4, and 5 lifter motors (M7), and cassette paper size switch (SW4)

J126 : memory tag connector

J108 : environmental sensor

J110 : YM laser (FFC)

J127 : pre-exposure LEDs (rear), fuser delivery sensor (SR5), New ITB sensor

(SR10)

J128 : Delivery tray media full sensor

(SR6), Fuser pressure release sensor

(SR7), and pre-exposure LEDs (front)

J153

J154

: power supply fan (FM1)

: not used

J111 : CK laser (FFC) J129 : front-door switch (SW5) J155 : Residual toner-feed motor (M12) and delivery fan (FM3)

J160 : fuser J112 : cyan/black scanner motor (M8), yellow/magenta scanner motor (M9), and developing disengagement sensor

(SR11)

J130 : registration density (RD) sensors

(front and rear)

J113 : 24 v to high-voltage power supply

(HVPS) upper (FFC)

J131 : media sensors

J114 : HVPS lower (FFC)

J161 : LVPS

J140 : ITB motor (M1), yellow drum home-position sensor (SR1), magenta drum home-position sensor (SR2), cyan drum home-position sensor (SR3), black drum home-position sensor (SR4), and primary transfer roller disengagement solenoid (SL1)

J162 : fuser

282 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Controller PCA (1 x 500-sheet and 3 x 500-sheet optional paper feeders)

Figure 3-32 Controller PCA connectors

J410

J409

J408

J404

J407

J401

J406

J405

J403

Table 3-11 Controller PCA connectors

J401 : not used

J402 : lifter motor 3 signal

J403 : cassette media presence 3

J404 : right door open sensor

J405 : lifter motor 2 signal

J406 : cassette media presence 2

J407 : lifter motor 1 signal

J408 : cassette media presence 1

J409 : pickup motor

J410 : communication (command)

J402

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 283

Locations of major components

Figure 3-33 External component locations

Item

Description

Rear-top cover

Right-door assembly

Right-rear cover

Right-front cover

Upper-left cover

Left cover

Item

Description

Power-supply cover

Rear cover

Tray 2

Front-door assembly

Control-panel assembly

Front-top cover

284 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Figure 3-34 Major component locations (1 of 3)

ENWW

Item

Description

Main drive assembly

Fuser

Registration assembly

Toner collection unit

Laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk)

Laser/scanner assembly (Y/M)

Tools for troubleshooting 285

Figure 3-35 Major component locations (2 of 3)

Item

Description

Duplex-drive assembly

MP tray assembly

Delivery assembly

RD sensor assembly

Tray-pickup assembly

Item

Description

Delivery fan

Cartridge fan

Residual toner full sensor

Residual-toner-feed motor

286 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Figure 3-36 Major component locations (3 of 3)

ENWW

Item

Description

Fuser-drive assembly

Tray-pickup drive assembly

Secondary transfer assembly

ITB

Lifter-drive assembly

Lifter base assembly

Tools for troubleshooting 287

Ite m

Description

Fuser motor

Pickup motor

Tray 1 separation pad

Yellow drum motor

Magenta drum motor

Cyan drum motor

ITB motor

Power supply fan

288 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Figure 3-37 Motors, fans, and rollers component locations

Item Description

Tray 2 feed roller

Tray 2 separation roller

Tray 2 pickup roller

Secondary transfer roller

Black drum motor

Developing-disengagement motor

Tray 1 pickup roller

Exhaust fan

ENWW

Figure 3-38 PCA component locations

Item

Description

Interconnect board (ICB)

DC controller PCA

Low-voltage power supply

Item

Description

High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T)

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D)

Environment sensor PCA

Tools for troubleshooting 289

Figure 3-39 Optional paper feeder (1 x 500-sheet) component locations (1 of 2)

Item

Description

Rear-right cover

Right door

Right cover

Left cover

Item

Description

Rear cover

Right front cover

Front door

Tray 3

290 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Figure 3-40 Optional paper feeder (1 x 500-sheet) component locations (2 of 2)

5 1

ENWW

Item

Description

Lifter-drive assembly

Pickup motor

Pickup assembly

Item

Description

Controller PCA

Lifter base assembly

Tools for troubleshooting 291

Figure 3-41 Optional paper feeder (3 x 500-sheet) component locations (1 of 2)

Item

Description

Rear right cover

Right door

Right cover

Left cover

Item

Description

Rear cover

Right front cover

Trays 3, 4, and 5

292 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Figure 3-42 Optional paper feeder (3 x 500-sheet) component locations (2 of 2)

5 1

ENWW

Item

Description

Lifter-drive assembly (Trays 3, 4, and 5)

Pickup motor

Pickup assembly (Trays 3, 4, and 5)

Item

Description

Controller PCA

Lifter base assembly (Trays 3, 4, and 5)

Tools for troubleshooting 293

General timing chart

Figure 3-43 General timing chart

294 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Circuit diagrams

Figure 3-44 General circuit diagram (1 of 2)

6 5

TH4

J82L

J82DH

J82D

2 1

1 2

J81L

J81DH

J81D

TO IPTU & SS

J85DH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

J85D

TA G (Bk) TA G (C) TAG (M) TAG (Y)

SR9

J19

1 2 3

SR7

J46

SR6

J47

1 2 3

11 10 9

1 2 3

8 7

4 5

4 3 2 1

8 9 10 11

J60L

J60D

J60DH

J40

2 1

J103

J71L

J71LH

J71D

J41

J72L

J72LH

J72D

J42

J87L

J87LH

J87D

/BD21

LD1PDOUT 22

/VDO12O 21

VDO12O

LD1CTRL2

LD1CTRL1

LD1CTRL0

/VDO11O

VDO11O

5VC

SGND

13 11

12 L_LOW_PWR 12

13 LD2PDOUT 11

SGND

/VDO2 2

VDO2 2

LD2CTRL2

LD2CTRL1

LD2CTRL0

/VDO21

VDO21

SGND

5VC

/BD41 23

LD3PDOUT 22

/VDO32

VDO32

LD3CTRL2

LD3CTRL1

LD3CTRL0

/VDO31

VDO31

5VC

14 10

11 SGND 13

12 L_LOW_PW R 12

LD4PDOUT

SGND

/VDO42

VDO42 8

7 LD4CTRL2

LD4CTRL1

LD4CTRL0

/VDO41

VDO41

2 SGND

5VC

FAN1PWM

FAN1LK

PGND

20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

J106

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24VA

/SCN1ACC

/SCN1DEC

PGND

24VA

/SCN2ACC

/SCN2DEC

PGND

3.3V S

SGND

DEVHP

SGND

24VB

PGND

5VB

PGND

24VB

/HVRESET2

HVDALD2

HVDACLK2

HVDATA 2

1TR1S

1TR2S

1TR4S

1TR3S

13 HVTCLK

12 2TRS

2TRCNT

/2TRNCNT

DUPMPHB

DUPMI0B

DUPMI1B

DUPMIDWN

DUPMI1A

DUPMI0A

DUPMPHA

DUPSL

1 1

DEVMOUT1B

DEVMOUT0A

DEVMOUT1A

DEVMOUT0B

J38

FEEDMOUT0A

FEEDMOUT1A

FEEDMOUT1B

FEEDMOUT0B

J37

8 7 6 5 4

J126

3 2 1 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

J128

DC Controller PCA

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J34

J57LH

J57L

J57D

J69DH

J69D

J69L

HVT-T

DUP_SL

+24VB

DUPM_/B

DUPM_/A

J39

CSTSIZE0

SGND

CSTSIZE1

J56L

J56D

J56DH

CSTSIZE2

+24VB

LUON

PGND

+24VA

SGND

3.3V

INPOPTMG

INPOPCLK

INPOPI N

INPOPOT

GND

J79D

J79H

J79L

FAN5LK

+24V

PSNS_PCB

J67L

J58D

J67DH

J67D

I2CSCK

SGND

I2CSD A

3.3V

24 VA

PGND

24VB

PGND

SGND

5VB

3.3VS

SGND

CSTPS2

CSTPS1

J58L

J58LH

J59L

J59H

J59D

24VB

CSTSL

FAN5LK

DEVMPHB

DEVMI0B

FAN2LK

DEVMI0A

FAN2PWM

DEVMPHA

RTS4SNS

FEEDMPHB

RTS3SNS

11 FEEDMI0B

RTS2SNS

FEEDMI1B

14 14 RTS1SNS

15 FEEDMIDWN 15

16 WTSSNS 16

FEEDMI1A

TONLED

FEEDMI0A

/DEV4CNT

21 FEEDMPHA 21

/DEV3CNT

/HVRESET

/DEV2CNT

25 HVDALD

26 /DEV1CNT

HVDACLK

HVTCLK

29 HVTDA TA1

HVT-D

J65DH

J65D

GND

FAN2LK

+24V

+5V

WTSSNS

+5V

RT1_S

GND

+5V

RT2_S

GND

+5V

RT3_S

GND

+5V

RT4_S

GND

J68DH

J68D

J65L

J66DH

J66D

J66L

J68L

J1D

J1DH

J2D

J2DH

J3D

J3DH

J1L

J2L

J3L

RDSRGAIN0

RDSRGAIN1

RDSRLED

DSRSR

DSRDR

+5VB

SGND

+5VB

DSFDR

DSFSR

RDSFLED

RDSFGAIN1

RDSFGAIN0

J83L

J83D

J83DH

SGND

RDOORSN S

J4D

J4DH J4L

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 295

Figure 3-45 General circuit diagram (1 of 2)

FP 5V

SGND

/FPCS

Control

Panel

FPCLK

FPI

FP 0

FP 3.3V

SGND

Inter Connect Board

J301

J45

SW5

2 1

1 2

SW1

FT2

2 1

PGND

+12V

Power SW

SW3

J84

2 3 4 5

2 1

J129

FSMFR

/FSMFG

/FSMDE C

/FSMACC

PGND

+24VB

J13

3 2 1

J152

J78D

J78D H

PREEXP1

+5VB

PREEXP2

+5VB

PREEXP3

+5VB

PREEXP4

+5VB

ITBLKSNS

SGND

3.3VS

POUTSN S

SGND

3.3VS

J78L

LED 4

LED 3

LED 2

LED 1

J63D

J63DH

WTMSNS

+24VB

PGND

FAN3LK

FAN3PWM

J77DH

J77D

NPCLK

SGND

NPSD_RD

NPSD_OUT

5VA

/NPRST

NPSTART

NPSL_DATA

NPSL_EN

NPLED

J63L

SOLD30

SOLD31

J77L

J64DH

J64D Registration Unit

(Duplex model)

J53D

J53DH

J53 L

PGND

CHK24V

RMCL

24VB

TOPI

SGND

3.3V S

3.3V

NPTRLED

REFEED S

SGND

3.3V S

J74D

J74D H

J75DH

J75D

MPTPEND

SGND

3.3VS

MPTSL

24VB

J75L

J74L

J52D

J52DH

J52L

J54L

J54D

J54DH

J105

J14

J17

+24VA

PGND

DRMFR

/DRM2ACC

/DRM2DEC

/DRM2FG

+24VA

PGND

DRMFR

/DRM1ACC

/DRM1DEC

/DRM1FG

J18

J15

+24VA

PGND

DRMKFR

/DRM4ACC

/DRM4DE C

/DRM4FG

+24VA

PGND

DRMFR

/DRM3ACC

/DRM3DE C

/DRM3FG

J16

N.C.

+24VB

1TRSL

3.3V S

SGND

DRMHP1

3.3V S

SGND

DRMHP2

3.3V S

SGND

DRMHP3

3.3V S

SGND

DRMHP4

+24VB

PGND

/BMACC

/BMDE C

/BMFG

TCK

P81

P80

MD2

MD0

IOTT

SGND

IOTR

+3.3V

Registration Unit (Simplex model)

SGND

FSR TH3 2

FSLP1

4 FSLP2

SGND 5

3.3VS

FSRSNS 7

SGND 1

FSR TH2

SGND

FSR TH1 4

/FSRNE W 5

FT1 J61F J61M

6 5 4 3

J603

2 1

PGND

+24VB

+24VA

5VB

24RMT

PWRSWON

3.3V F

SGND

PFCRMT

ZEROX

FSRD1

SGND

/RLD

FSR_CURRMS

FSRSAFE1

INL_CURRMS

FSRSAFE2

/FSRMSTOP

24VB

CHK24V

TB406

TB405

TB404

TB403

TB402

TB401

Power Supply Unit

100V 200V

IL101 IL201

L N

1 2

J604

L N

1 2

J604A

SW_LED

SGND

PSTYP100

ACH ACL

J25F

J50D

J50L

J25M

TB2

TP1

TB1

1 2

J12

N.C.

J51L

J51DH

2 1

J351

J51D

J11

SR14

TH2

TH1

FU1

J10

SR15

296 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

ENWW

Figure 3-46 Paper feeder circuit diagram (1 X 500-sheet)

+24V

GND

+3.3V

STS

CLK

CMD

HRD_TMG

THS

+3.3U

T3_PLVL_A

T3_PA

GND

+24V

T3_PLVL_P

+3.3U

GND

T3_PSNS

T3_PICK_SL

7 6 5 4 3

J407

2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J401

J409

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

3 2 1

1 2 3 4

SW2

1 2

1 2 3 4

Tools for troubleshooting 297

Figure 3-47 Paper feeder circuit diagram (3 X 500-sheet)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

J401

+24V

T5_LIFT_MTR

T5_SIZE3

GND

T5_SIZE2

T5_SIZE1

GND

+24V

GND

+3.3V

CLK

STS

CMD

HRD_TMG

THS T3_PA

GND

+24V

+3.3U

T3_PLVL_A

T3_PLVL_P

+3.3U

GND

T3_PSNS

T3_PICK_SL

7 6 5 4 3

J407

2 1

J409

4 3 2 1 2 1

J404

11 10 9 8 7 6

J406

5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3

J405

2 1

1 2 3 4

3 2 1

1 2

1 2 3 4

SW2

SW1

1 2

2 1

SL2

1 2 3

SR7

SR6

1 2 3 4 5

5 4 3 2 1

SR8

SR5

1 2 3 4

SW3

+3.3U

GND

T5_PSNS

T5_PLVL_P

T5_PLVL_A

+3.3U

GND

T5_PATHS

+24V

T5_PICK_SL

298 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

HP Easy Printer Care

Open the HP Easy Printer Care software

Use one of the following methods to open the HP Easy Printer Care software:

● On the Start menu, select Programs , select Hewlett-Packard , select HP Easy Printer Care , and then click Start HP Easy Printer Care .

●

In the Windows system tray (in the lower-right corner of the desktop), double-click the HP Easy

Printer Care icon.

● Double-click the desktop icon.

HP Easy Printer Care software sections

HP Easy Printer Care software can provide information about multiple HP products that are on your network as well as any products that are directly connected to your computer. Some of the items that are in the following table might not be available for every product.

The Help button ( ?

) in the upper-right corner of each page provides more detailed information about the options on that page.

Section Options

●

Devices list: Shows the products that you can select.

Device List tab

When you open the software, this is the first page that appears.

NOTE: The product information appears either in list form or as icons, depending on the setting for the View as option.

NOTE: To return to this page from any tab, click My HP Printers in the left side of the window.

●

The information on this tab includes current alerts for the product.

● If you click a product in the list, the HP Easy Printer Care opens the

Overview tab for that product.

Compatible Printers Provides a list of all the HP products that support HP Easy Printer Care software.

Find Other Printers

Add more products to the

My HP Printers list

window Click the Find Other Printers link in the Devices list to open the Find Other

Printers window. The Find Other Printers window provides a utility that detects other network printers so that you can add them to the My HP Printers list and then monitor those products from your computer.

Overview tab

Contains basic status information for the product

● Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as when a print cartridge has reached is estimated end of life. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.

●

Supplies Status section: Shows detailed supplies status, such as the estimated life remaining in the print cartridge and the status of the paper that is loaded in each tray.

●

Supplies Details link: Opens the supplies status page to view more detailed information about product supplies, ordering information, and recycling information.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 299

Section Options

Support tab

Provides links to support information

● Device Status section: This section shows product-identification information and the product status. It indicates product-alert conditions, such as a print cartridge that is at its estimated end of life. After you correct a problem with the product, click the refresh button in the upper-right corner of the window to update the status.

●

Device Management section: Provides links to information about HP Easy

Printer Care, to advanced product settings, and to product usage reports.

Settings

Configure product settings, adjust printquality settings, and find information about specific product features

NOTE:

tab

This tab is not available for some products.

● Troubleshooting and Help : Provides links to tools that you can use to resolve problems, to online product support information, and to online HP experts.

●

About : Provides general information about this tab.

●

General : Provides information about the product, such as the model number, serial number, and the settings for date and time, if they are available.

●

Information Pages : Provides links to print the information pages that are available for the product.

●

Capabilities : Provides information about product features, such as duplexing, the available memory, and the available printing personalities. Click Change to adjust the settings.

● Print Quality : Provides information about print-quality settings. Click

Change to adjust the settings.

●

Trays / Paper : Provides information about the trays and how they are configured. Click Change to adjust the settings.

●

Restore Defaults : Provides a way to restore the product settings to the factory defaults. Click Restore to restore the settings to the defaults.

HP Proactive Support

NOTE: This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

When enabled, HP Proactive Support routinely scans your printing system to identify potential problems. Click the more info link to configure how frequently the scans occur. This page also provides information about available updates for product software, firmware, and HP printer drivers. You can accept or decline each recommended update.

Supplies Ordering button

Click the Supplies Ordering button on any tab to open the Supplies Ordering window, which provides access to online supplies ordering.

●

Ordering list: Shows the supplies that you can order for each product. To order a certain item, click the Order check box for that item in the supplies list. You can sort the list by product, or by the supplies that need to be ordered the soonest. The list contains supplies information for every product that is in the

My HP Printers list.

NOTE: This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

● Shop Online for Supplies button: Opens the HP SureSupply Web site in a new browser window. If you have checked the Order check box for any items, the information about those items can be transferred to the Web site, where you will receive information on options for purchasing your selected supplies.

●

Print Shopping List button: Prints the information for the supplies that have the Order check box selected.

300 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Section Options

Alert Settings link

NOTE: This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

Color Access Control

Click Alert Settings to open the Alert Settings window, in which you can configure alerts for each product.

●

Alerting is on or off: Activates or deactivates the alerts feature.

● Printer Alerts : Select the option to receive alerts for critical errors only, or for any error.

●

Job Alerts : For products that support it, you can receive alerts for specific print jobs.

Use this feature to permit or restrict color printing.

NOTE: This item is available only for

HP color products that support Color

Access Control.

NOTE: This item is available from the

Overview and Support tabs.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 301

Internal print-quality test pages

Print-quality-troubleshooting pages

Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING , and then press the OK button to print the pages.

The product returns to the Ready state after printing the print-quality-troubleshooting pages. Follow the instructions on the pages that print out.

Figure 3-48 Print-quality troubleshooting procedure hp color LaserJet CP 4520 Printers

Print Quality Troubleshooting Procedure

302 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Figure 3-49 Yellow print-quality troubleshooting page

Yellow

Green

Figure 3-50 Yellow comparison page

Green

Yellow

ENWW

Yellow cannot be easily seen unless combined with cyan, so half of each page is yellow and the other half is an amplified version of yellow problems (green half). Compare the yellow on page one with the corresponding green on page two for defects. You can also check the cyan page for defects.

Tools for troubleshooting 303

Figure 3-51 Black print-quality troubleshooting page

1. Grids

2. Color plane registration (CPR) bars

3. Color ramp patches

The grids are in inches and millimeters. They are label with letters and numbers so that defects can be described by position and by distance between repeats.

After printing, the box with no extra color in each area on each page shows how far off the CPR of that color is. Each page has two process direction areas and three scan direction areas that are labeled x and y and 1–11. The page should be fed by the long edge. Each square from the center equals 42 microns.

Used to detect offset for the OPC or developer in the image drum or offset in the fuser.

NOTE: To get further assistance in print quality troubleshooting, go to www.hp.com/support/ cljcp4025 or www.hp.com/support/cljcp4525 and select PQ Troubleshooting Tools.

304 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Diagnostics page

Use the diagnostics page to evaluate problems with color plane registration, EP parameters, and print quality.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE , and then press the OK button to print the page.

HP Color LaserJet CP 4520 Printers

Diagnostics Page

1 Page 1 3

5 6

7 8

DD MMM YYYY XX:XX

Calibration information

Parameters

Color density

Color plane registration

Primary colors

Secondary colors

Temperature values (22M)

Humidity values (22N)

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 305

Cleaning page

Create and use the cleaning page

Press the Home button .

Press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the PRINT QUALITY menu, and then press the

OK button.

If the product does not have automatic two-sided printing, press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the CREATE CLEANING PAGE option, and then press the OK button. If the product has automatic two-sided printing, go to step 5.

Press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the PROCESS CLEANING PAGE option, and then press the OK button.

Discard the printed page. The task is complete.

306 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Configuration page

Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you select PRINT CONFIGURATION . In addition to the main configuration page, an embedded Jetdirect configuration page prints.

Configuration page

Use the configuration page to view current product settings, to help troubleshoot product problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight INFORMATION , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION , and then press the OK button.

The message PRINTING CONFIGURATION displays on the control panel until the product finishes printing the configuration page. The product returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page.

NOTE: If the product is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect Print Server) or an optional hard-disk drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices.

Figure 3-52 Configuration page

HP Color LaserJet CP 4520 Printers

Configuration Page

Page 1

ENWW

Printer information

Installed personalities and options

Color density

Calibration information

ENGLISH

Tools for troubleshooting 307

Memory

Event log

Security

Paper trays and options

308 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

HP embedded Jetdirect page

The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information:

Figure 3-53 HP embedded Jetdirect page

HP Color LaserJet CP 4520 Printers

Embedded Jetdirect Page

Page 1

HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the product status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date.

Security Settings information

Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions.

TCP/IP information, including the IP address

IPv4 information

IPv6 information

Always make sure the status line under the HP Jetdirect configuration lines indicates "I/O Card Ready".

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 309

Embedded protocol page

The embedded protocol page contains the following information:

Figure 3-54 Embedded protocol page

HP Color LaserJet CP 3525 Printers

Embedded Protocol Page

Page 1

1 3

IPX/SPX

Novell/NetWare

AppleTalk

DLC/LLC

310 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Finding important information on the configuration pages

Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the e-mail gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the product. This information is on the various configuration pages.

Table 3-12 Important information on the configuration pages

Type of information Specific information Configuration page

Firmware date codes DC controller Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”

When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded.

Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”

Embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the embedded Jetdirect page, under “HP Jetdirect Configuration.”

Accessories and internal storage External disk (optional)

All optional devices that are installed on the product should be listed on the main configuration page.

Embedded HP Jetdirect

In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory. These pages list more-detailed information for those devices.

Total RAM

Duplex unit

Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and

Options.” Shows model and capacity.

Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and

Options.” Shows model and ID.

Look on the main configuration page, under “Memory.”

Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.”

Additional 500-sheet feeders

Engine cycles and event logs

Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing product maintenance.

Additional 500-sheet feeders

Engine cycles

Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.”

Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”

The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the

DIAGNOSTICS menu.

Pages since last maintenance (print engine maintenance count)

Event-log information

Pages since last maintenance (print engine maintenance count)

Event-log information

Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.”

Look on the main configuration page, under “Event log.”

Color-band test

The color-band test page shows bands of colors that can indicate whether or not the product is producing colors correctly.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight COLOR BAND TEST , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT TEST PAGE , and then press the OK button.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 311

Print-quality troubleshooting tools

Repetitive defects ruler

If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced.

Figure 3-55 Repetitive defects ruler

0 mm

27 mm

32 mm

44 mm

48 mm

51 mm

55 mm

63 mm

76 mm

80 mm

96 mm

101 mm

Distance between defects

27 mm

32 mm

44 mm

48 mm

51 mm

55 mm

63 mm

76 mm

80 mm

96 mm

101 mm

312 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Product components that cause the defect

Print cartridge

Transfer unit

Print cartridge

Transfer roller

Print engine

Transfer unit

Print cartridge

Fuser

Print engine

ENWW

Calibrate the product

Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality problems, calibrate the product.

Press the Home button .

Press the down arrow to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the PRINT QUALITY menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the FULL CALIBRATE NOW or QUICK CALIBRATE NOW setting, and then press the OK button.

● FULL CALIBRATE NOW : takes about three minutes and performs color plane registration, drum speed adjustment, and Dmax and Dhalf adjustments. Use FULL CALIBRATE NOW if colors are misaligned or appear blurry. FULL CALIBRATE NOW runs automatically after a new transfer belt is installed. FULL CALIBRATE NOW must be run manually after a laser scanner is replaced.

●

QUICK CALIBRATE NOW : takes approximately 1 minute and performs Dmax and Dhalf calibrations. Use QUICK CALIBRATE NOW if colors are wrong, highlights are missing, or if colors are too dark or too light.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 313

Control panel menus

You can control the product by changing settings in the menus on the product control panel. Use the control panel to access features not supported by the printer driver or software application, and to configure trays for paper size and type.

Show Me How menu

The SHOW ME HOW menu prints pages that provide more information about the product. You can print the pages and keep them near the product for convenient reference.

To display: Press the Home button , and then select the SHOW ME HOW menu.

Item

CLEAR JAMS

LOAD TRAYS

LOAD SPECIAL MEDIA

LOAD MEDIA 4 X 6 (10 X 15CM)

PRINT BOTH SIDES

SUPPORTED PAPER

PRINT HELP GUIDE

Explanation

Provides instructions for clearing jams on the product.

Provides instructions for loading and configuring trays.

Provides instructions for loading special print media such as envelopes, transparencies, and labels.

Provides instructions for loading 4 x 6 media.

Provides instructions for printing on both sides of the paper (duplex printing).

Provides a list of the supported paper and print media.

Prints a page that shows links to additional help on the Web.

Retrieve job menu

Use the RETRIEVE JOB menu to view listings of all stored jobs.

To display: Press the Home button , and then select the RETRIEVE JOB menu.

Item

NO STORED JOBS

<USER NAME>

Sub-item Sub-item Description

This message appears if no jobs are currently stored on the product.

Each user who has stored jobs is listed by name. Select the appropriate user name to see a list of stored jobs.

314 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Item Sub-item Sub-item

ALL JOBS (WITH PIN) PRINT

PRINT AND DELETE

●

COPIES

●

JOB

● CUSTOM VALUE

DELETE

Description

This message appears if a user has two or more stored jobs that require a PIN. If

PRINT or PRINT AND DELETE is selected then the PIN will be requested.

If the jobs have different PINs, only the jobs with the PIN entered will be printed.

If the PIN does not match any of the jobs, an error message is displayed.

Either the PRINT option or the PRINT

AND DELETE option displays, depending on the type of jobs listed. If the stored jobs are Personal or Proof and

Hold jobs, PRINT AND DELETE is displayed. These jobs are deleted after they are printed. If PRINT is displayed, there is at least one Quick Copy or standard stored job. When PRINT is selected, any Personal or Proof and Hold jobs in the list will be printed and deleted.

When PRINT or PRINT AND DELETE is selected, the COPIES option allows you to specify the number of copies of the job to print. The default is 1 and the range is from 1 to 3,200.

The following copy options are also available:

●

Select the JOB option to print the number of copies specified in the driver.

●

Select the CUSTOM VALUE option to specify the number of copies of the job to be printed. The number of copies that were specified in the driver are multiplied by the number of copies specified on the control panel. For example, if you specified two copies in the driver and specify two copies on the control panel, a total of four copies of the job are printed.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 315

Item Sub-item

ALL JOBS (NO PIN)

Sub-item

PRINT

PRINT AND DELETE

●

COPIES

●

JOB

● CUSTOM VALUE

DELETE

<JOB NAME X> PRINT

PRINT AND DELETE

●

COPIES

DELETE

316 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Description

This message appears if a user has two or more stored jobs that do not require a

PIN.

Either the PRINT option or the PRINT

AND DELETE option displays, depending on the type of jobs listed. If the stored jobs are Personal or Proof and

When PRINT or PRINT AND DELETE is selected, the COPIES option allows you to specify the number of copies of the job to print. The default is 1 and the range is from 1 to 3,200.

The following copy options are also available:

● Select the JOB option to print the number of copies specified in the driver.

●

Each individual job for the user is listed by name.

Either the PRINT option or the PRINT

AND DELETE option displays, depending on the type of jobs listed. If

PRINT AND DELETE is displayed, all of the stored jobs are either Personal or

Proof and Hold jobs. These jobs are deleted after they are printed. If PRINT is displayed, there is at least one Quick

Copy or Standard stored job. If there are any Personal or Proof and Hold jobs they will be printed and deleted, even though the PRINT option was selected.

When PRINT or PRINT AND DELETE is selected, a COPIES option allows you to specify the number of copies of the job to print. The default is 1 and the range is from 1 to 3,200.

ENWW

Information menu

Use the INFORMATION menu to access and print specific product information.

To display: Press the Home button , and then select the INFORMATION menu.

Item

PRINT MENU MAP

PRINT CONFIGURATION

PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE

SUPPLIES STATUS

PRINT USAGE PAGE

PRINT COLOR USAGE JOB LOG

PRINT DEMO PAGE

PRINT RGB SAMPLES

PRINT CMYK SAMPLES

PRINT FILE DIRECTORY

PRINT PCL FONT LIST

PRINT PS FONT LIST

Description

Prints the control-panel menu map, which shows the layout and current settings of the control-panel menu items.

Prints the product configuration pages, which show the printer settings and installed accessories.

Prints the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.

HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different than the approximations provided.

Displays the approximate status of the print cartridges, transfer kit, fuser kit, and toner collection unit in a scrollable list. Press the OK button to open help for each item.

Prints a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count.

Prints the color-use statistics for the printer.

Prints a demonstration page.

Prints color samples for different RGB values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors.

Prints color samples for different CMYK values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors.

Prints the name and directory of files stored in the product.

Prints the available PCL fonts.

Prints the available PS fonts.

Paper handling menu

Use this menu to configure input trays by size and type. It is important to correctly configure the trays with this menu before you print for the first time. This menu also appears when you close Trays 2-5 and press the OK button after the prompt to set the paper size and type.

To display: Press the Home button , and then select the PAPER HANDLING menu.

NOTE: If you have used other HP LaserJet product models, you might be accustomed to configuring

Tray 1 to First mode or Cassette mode. On HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CP4020-CP4520 Series printers, setting Tray 1 to ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE is equivalent to First mode. Setting Tray 1 to a setting other than ANY SIZE or ANY TYPE is equivalent to Cassette mode.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 317

Menu item

TRAY 1 SIZE

TRAY 1 TYPE

TRAY <X> SIZE

X = 2 or optional 3, 4, or 5

TRAY <X> TYPE

X = 2 or optional 3, 4, or 5

Value

A list of available sizes appears.

A list of available types appears.

A list of available sizes appears.

A list of available types appears.

Description

Allows you to configure the paper size for

Tray 1. The default is ANY SIZE . See the product user guide for a complete list of available sizes.

Allows you to configure the paper type for

Tray 1. The default is ANY TYPE . See the product user guide for a complete list of available types.

Allows you to configure the paper size for

Tray 2 or optional Tray 3, 4, or 5. These trays can detect the paper size by the guides in the tray. See the product user guide for a complete list of available sizes.

Allows you to configure the paper type for

Tray 2 or optional Tray 3, 4, or 5. The default is PLAIN . See the product user guide for a complete list of available types.

Manage supplies menu

Use this menu to configure how the product alerts you when supplies are approaching the estimated end of life.

To display: Press the Home button , and then select the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Menu item

AT VERY LOW

Sub-menu item

BLACK CARTRIDGE

Values

STOP

PROMPT TO CONTINUE *

CONTINUE

Description

Select what the product should do when the print cartridge is very near the end of its estimated life.

STOP : The product stops until you replace the cartridge.

PROMPT TO CONTINUE : The product stops until you clear the prompt message. After the prompt message is cleared, there will not be another message indicating that the supply needs to be replaced.

CONTINUE : The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing. There will not be another message indicating that the supply needs to be replaced.

318 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Menu item

ENWW

Sub-menu item

COLOR CARTRIDGES

TRANSFER KIT

FUSER KIT

TONER COLLECTION UNIT

Values

STOP

PROMPT TO CONTINUE *

CONTINUE

PRINT IN BLACK

STOP

PROMPT TO CONTINUE *

CONTINUE

STOP

PROMPT TO CONTINUE *

CONTINUE

STOP *

PROMPT TO CONTINUE

CONTINUE

Description

Select what the product should do when the print cartridge is very near the end of its estimated life.

STOP : The product stops until you replace the cartridge.

PROMPT TO CONTINUE : The product stops until you clear the prompt message.

CONTINUE : The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing.

PRINT IN BLACK : The product prints in black when a color cartridge is near the end of its estimated life.

STOP : The product stops until you replace the transfer kit.

PROMPT TO CONTINUE : The product stops until you clear the prompt message.

CONTINUE : The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing.

STOP : The product stops until you replace the fuser kit.

PROMPT TO CONTINUE : The product stops until you clear the prompt message.

CONTINUE : The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing.

STOP : The product stops until you replace the toner collection unit.

PROMPT TO CONTINUE : The product stops until you clear the prompt message.

CONTINUE : The product provides an alert message, but it continues printing.

NOTE: Using a Toner collection unit after a prompt or alert message might result in toner leakage, especially when replacing the Toner collection unit.

Tools for troubleshooting 319

Menu item

USER DEFINED LOW

SUPPLY MESSAGES

Sub-menu item

YELLOW CARTRIDGE

MAGENTA CARTRIDGE

CYAN CARTRIDGE

BLACK CARTRIDGE

TRANSFER KIT

Values

Range from 0–100%

FUSER KIT

LOW MESSAGE

Range from 0–100%

Default is 2%

Range from 0–100%

Default is 2%

ON *

OFF

LEVEL GAUGE ON *

OFF

Description

Use the arrow buttons to enter the percentage of estimated cartridge life at which you want the product to alert you that the cartridge is low.

Use the arrow buttons to enter the percentage of estimated cartridge life at which you want the product to alert you.

Select how the product displays the supply information.

LOW MESSAGE : Determines whether or not a low supply message is displayed on the control panel.

LEVEL GAUGE : Determines whether or not a supply level gauge appears on the control panel.

320 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Menu item

RESTRICT COLOR USE

COLOR/BLACK MIX

Sub-menu item Values

ENABLE COLOR *

COLOR IF ALLOWED

DISABLE COLOR

AUTO *

MOSTLY COLOR PAGES

MOSTLY BLACK PAGES

Description

This menu item controls the authorization of color printing.

DISABLE COLOR : All jobs sent to the product print only in monochrome.

ENABLE COLOR : All color pages sent to the product print in color.

COLOR IF ALLOWED : A permissions database is referenced to verify if color pages are printed in color or monochrome.

These menu selections allow you to balance the trade-off between supply life and performance.

AUTO : The product software uses an algorithm based on printing data to achieve the best output.

MOSTLY COLOR PAGES : This selection provides the highest performance. If most of the printing is in color, this selection will not negatively affect supply life.

MOSTLY BLACK PAGES : This selection conserves the most supply life and is the best choice if most of the printing is done in black and white.

Configure device menu

The CONFIGURE DEVICE menu allows you to change the default printing settings, adjust the print quality, change the system configuration and I/O options, and reset the default settings.

Printing menu

These settings affect only jobs without identified properties. Most jobs identify all of the properties and override the values set from this menu.

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

PRINTING menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 321

Menu item

COPIES

Sub-menu item Values

Range: 1 - 32000

DEFAULT PAPER SIZE

DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER

SIZE

DUPLEX

●

UNIT OF MEASURE

●

X DIMENSION

●

Y DIMENSION

A list of available sizes appears.

OFF *

DUPLEX BINDING

OVERRIDE A4/LETTER

MANUAL FEED

COURIER FONT

WIDE A4

PRINT PS ERRORS

PRINT PDF ERRORS

LONG EDGE

YES

OFF

REGULAR

DARK

NO *

YES

OFF

SHORT EDGE

Description

Allows you to set the default number of copies for print jobs.

The default number is 1 .

Allows you to set the default paper size.

Allows you to set the default size for any custom print job that does not specify the dimensions.

The default unit of measure is

MILLIMETERS .

Allows you to enable or disable two-sided printing.

NOTE: This menu is available only on models that have automatic duplexing.

Allows you to change the binding edge for two-sided printing.

NOTE: This menu is available only on models that have automatic duplexing.

Allows you to set the product to print an A4 job on letter-size paper when no tray is configured for A4 paper, or to print on A4size paper when no tray is configured for letter paper.

Setting this option to ON makes

MANUAL FEED the default for jobs that do not select a tray. The

Autoselect option in the printer driver overrides this option.

Allows you to select a version of the Courier font.

The DARK setting is an internal

Courier font available on HP

LaserJet Series III printers and older.

Allows you to change the printable area of A4 paper. If you select NO , the printable area is seventy-eight 10-pitch characters on a single line. If you select YES , the printable area is eighty 10-pitch characters on a single line.

Allows you to select to print PS error pages.

Allows you to select to print PDF error pages.

322 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

PCL sub-menu

This menu configures settings for the printer control language.

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, select the PRINTING menu, and then select the PCL menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Item Values Description

FORM LENGTH

ORIENTATION

FONT SOURCE

FONT NUMBER

FONT PITCH

FONT POINT SIZE

SYMBOL SET

APPEND CR TO LF

SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES

MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING

Range: 5-128 lines

PORTRAIT *

Sets vertical spacing for default paper size. The default is 60.

Allows you to set the default page orientation to portrait or landscape.

LANDSCAPE

A list of available font sources displays.

Selects the font source. The default is INTERNAL .

Range: 0-102

Range: 0.44-99.99

The product assigns a number to each font and lists the numbers on the PCL font list. The default is 0.

Selects the font pitch. This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. The default is 10.00.

Range: 4.00-999.75

Selects the font point size. The default is 12.00.

A list of available symbol sets displays.

Selects any one of several available symbol sets at the product control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for line-draw characters. The default is PC-8 .

NO *

YES

NO *

YES

STANDARD

CLASSIC

Select YES to append a carriage return to each line-feed that is encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments indicate a new line by only the line-feed control code. Use this option to append the required carriage return to each line feed.

When generating your own PCL, extra form feeds are included that would cause a blank page to be printed. Select

YES for form feeds to be ignored if the page is blank.

The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING command selects an input tray by a number that maps to the various available trays and feeders.

●

The STANDARD numbering is based on newer

HP LaserJet printers with updated changes to the numbering of trays and feeders.

●

The CLASSIC numbering is based on HP LaserJet 4 printers and earlier models.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 323

Print Quality menu

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

PRINT QUALITY menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Item

ADJUST COLOR

SET

REGISTRATION

Sub-item

HIGHLIGHTS

●

CYAN DENSITY

● MAGENTA DENSITY

●

YELLOW DENSITY

● BLACK DENSITY

MIDTONES

●

CYAN DENSITY

●

MAGENTA DENSITY

●

YELLOW DENSITY

●

BLACK DENSITY

SHADOWS

●

CYAN DENSITY

●

MAGENTA DENSITY

● YELLOW DENSITY

●

BLACK DENSITY

RESTORE COLOR

VALUES

Sub-item

ADJUST TRAY <X>

PRINT TEST

PAGE

Values

Range from +5 to

–5. Default is 0.

Description

Adjust the darkness or lightness of highlights on a printed page. Lower values represent lighter highlights on a printed page, and higher values represent darker highlights on a printed page.

Range from +5 to

–5. Default is 0.

Adjust the darkness or lightness of midtones on a printed page. Lower values represent lighter midtones on a printed page, and higher values represent darker midtones on a printed page.

Range from +5 to

–5. Default is 0.

Adjust the darkness or lightness of shadows on a printed page. Lower values represent lighter shadows on a printed page, and higher values represent darker shadows on a printed page.

Restore the color settings by resetting the density values of each color.

For each tray, setting the registration shifts the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom and from left to right. You can also align the image on the front with the image printed on the back.

Perform the alignment procedure for each tray.

When it creates an image, the product scans across the page from side to side as the sheet feeds from top to bottom into the product.

Print a test page and instructions for setting the registration of the image location.

324 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Item Sub-item

AUTO SENSE

MODE

TRAY 1 SENSING

TRAY <X> SENSING

Sub-item

X1 SHIFT

Y1 SHIFT

X2 SHIFT

Y2 SHIFT

Values Description

Range: -5 mm to

+5 mm

The scan direction is referred to as X. X1 is the scan direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a two-sided page. X2 is the scan direction for the first side of a two-sided page.

The feed direction is referred to as Y. Y1 is the feed direction for a single-sided page or for the second side of a two-sided page.

Y2 is the feed direction for the first side of a two-sided page.

FULL SENSING Sets the sensing option for Tray 1 for paper types using AUTO SENSE mode.

EXPANDED

SENSING *

TRANSPARENCY

ONLY

When FULL SENSING is selected, the product senses every page and switches modes accordingly. The product can distinguish light paper, plain paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, or transparencies. Using this mode significantly reduces print speed. Use it only when you are printing on mixed paper types.

When EXPANDED SENSING is selected, the product senses only the first page and assumes the rest of the pages are the same type. The product can distinguish light paper, plain paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, or transparencies.

When TRANSPARENCY ONLY is selected, the product senses only the first page. The product can distinguish transparencies from other paper types.

Sets the sensing option for Trays 2-5 for paper types using AUTO SENSE mode.

EXPANDED

SENSING *

TRANSPARENCY

ONLY

When EXPANDED SENSING is selected, the product senses only the first few pages and assumes the rest of the pages are the same type. The product can distinguish light paper, plain paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, or transparencies. The product senses the paper type when you turn it on and after you open and close a tray.

When TRANSPARENCY ONLY is selected, the product senses only the first page. The product can distinguish transparencies from other paper types.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 325

Item

ADJUST PAPER

TYPES

OPTIMIZE

QUICK CALIBRATE

NOW

FULL CALIBRATE

NOW

DELAY

CALIBRATION AT

WAKE/POWER-ON

Sub-item

A list of paper types displays.

RESTORE MODES

A list of available options displays.

RESTORE OPTIMIZE

Sub-item Values Description

PRINT MODE

RESISTANCE

MODE

HUMIDITY MODE

A list of print modes displays.

Configure the print mode that is associated with each media type.

PRE-ROTATION

MODE

FUSER TEMP

MODE

PAPER CURL

MODE

Use this feature to return all paper typemode settings to the factory-default settings.

Allows you to optimize various print modes to address print quality issues.

Use this feature to return all the settings in the OPTIMIZE menu to the factory-default values.

Performs a partial product calibration.

Performs all product calibrations.

RESOLUTION

YES *

Image REt 3600 *

1200x1200 dpi

This menu controls the timing of the calibration when the product wakes up or is turned on.

●

Select NO to have the product calibrate immediately when it wakes up or is turned on. The product will not print any jobs until it finishes calibrating.

● Select YES to enable a product that is asleep to accept print jobs before it calibrates. It may start calibrating before it has printed all the jobs it has received. This option allows quicker printing when coming out of sleep mode or when you turn the product on, but print quality might be reduced.

NOTE: For best results, allow the product to calibrate before printing. Print jobs performed before calibration might not be of the highest quality.

Sets the resolution at which the product prints. The default value is Image REt

3600 . Try the 1200x1200 dpi setting to improve printing for detailed line work or small text.

326 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Item

EDGE CONTROL

Sub-item

AUTO CLEANING

CLEANING

INTERVAL

AUTO CLEANING

SIZE

Sub-item

OFF *

500 *

1000

2000

5000

10000

20000

LETTER *

Values

OFF

LIGHT

NORMAL *

MAXIMUM

Description

The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color-plane misregistration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly.

●

OFF turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning.

● LIGHT sets trapping at a minimal level, and adaptive halftoning is on.

●

NORMAL is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on.

● MAXIMUM is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is on.

When auto-cleaning is on, the product prints a cleaning page when the page count reaches the CLEANING

INTERVAL setting.

Specify the number of pages that are printed before a cleaning page is automatically printed. This item appears only when the AUTO CLEANING option is set to ON .

Specify the paper size that is used to print the cleaning page. This item appears only when the to ON .

AUTO CLEANING option is set

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 327

Item

CREATE

CLEANING PAGE

Sub-item

PROCESS

CLEANING PAGE

Sub-item Values Description

Prints a page of instructions for cleaning excess toner off the pressure roller in the fuser.

NOTE: This option is available only for the HP Color LaserJet CP4025n printer and the HP Color LaserJet CP4525n printer.

Allows you to create and process a cleaning page for cleaning the pressure roller in the fuser. When the cleaning process runs, a cleaning page is printed.

This page can be discarded.

NOTE: For the HP Color LaserJet

CP4025n printer and the HP Color

LaserJet CP4525n printer, you must first select the CREATE CLEANING PAGE option.

328 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

System setup menu

Use the SYSTEM SETUP menu to change product-configuration defaults such as sleep mode, product personality (language), and jam recovery.

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

SYSTEM SETUP menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Item

DATE/TIME

Sub-item

DATE

Description

Allows you to set the correct date.

The range for the year is 2008 to

2037.

JOB STORAGE LIMIT

JOB HELD TIMEOUT

SHOW ADDRESS

TRAY BEHAVIOR

DATE FORMAT

TIME

TIME FORMAT

Values

- - - - /[MMM]/[DD] YEAR =

[YYYY]/- - - /[DD] MONTH=

[YYYY]/[MMM]/- - DAY=

YYYY/MMM/DD *

MMM/DD/YYYY

DD/MMM/YYYY

- - :[MM] [PM] HOUR =

[HH]: - - [PM] MINUTE=

[HH]:[MM] - - AM/PM=

12 HOUR *

24 HOUR

Continuous value

Range: 1–100

Default = 32

OFF *

1 HOUR

4 HOURS

1 DAY

1 WEEK

AUTO

OFF *

Allows you to choose the order in which the year, month, and day appear in the date.

Allows you to select from various configurations for the TIME format.

Different wizards appear depending on the TIME FORMAT selected.

Allows you to select 12 HOUR or

24 HOUR format.

Allows you to specify the number of Quick Copy jobs that can be stored on the product. The default value is 32. The maximum allowed value is 100.

Allows you to set the amount of time that Quick Copy jobs are kept before being automatically deleted from the queue. This menu item only appears when a hard disk is installed.

This item determines whether the product’s IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message.

Use this menu to control how the product handles paper trays and related prompts at the control panel.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 329

Item

330 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Sub-item

USE REQUESTED TRAY

Values

EXCLUSIVELY *

FIRST

MANUALLY FEED PROMPT ALWAYS *

UNLESS LOADED

PS DEFER MEDIA

SIZE/TYPE PROMPT

ENABLED *

DISABLED

DISPLAY *

DO NOT DISPLAY

Description

USE REQUESTED TRAY handles jobs that have specified a specific input tray. Two options are available:

●

EXCLUSIVELY : The product never selects a different tray when the user has indicated that a specific tray should be used, even if that tray is empty.

● FIRST : The product can pull from another tray if the specified tray is empty, even though the user specifically indicated a tray for the job.

This option controls whether a manual feed message should appear when the type or size for a job does not match the size or type configured for Tray 1. Two options are available:

●

ALWAYS : A prompt always appears before printing a manual-feed job.

●

UNLESS LOADED : A message appears only if the multipurpose tray is empty or does not match the size or type of the job.

This option affects how paper is handled when printing from an

Adobe PS print driver.

● ENABLED uses HP’s paperhandling model.

●

DISABLED uses the Adobe

PS paper-handling model.

This option controls whether the tray configuration message appears whenever a tray is closed.

Two options are available:

●

DISPLAY : This option shows the tray configuration message when a tray is closed. You can configure the tray size or type directly from this message.

●

DO NOT DISPLAY : This option prevents the tray configuration message from automatically appearing.

ENWW

Item Sub-item

USE ANOTHER TRAY

ALTERNATIVE

LETTERHEAD MODE

Values

ENABLED *

DISABLED

OFF *

DUPLEX BLANK PAGES AUTO *

YES

SLEEP DELAY

IMAGE ROTATION STANDARD *

ALTERNATE

1 MINUTE

3 MINUTES

5 MINUTES

10 MINUTES

15 MINUTES *

30 MINUTES

45 MINUTES

60 MINUTES

90 MINUTES

2 HOURS

ENWW

Description

This option turns on or off the control-panel prompt to select another tray when the specified tray is empty.

When this option is ON you can load letterhead or preprinted paper the same way for every job, whether printing on one or both sides of the page.

NOTE: This option is available only for models that have automatic duplexing.

This option controls how the product handles two-sided jobs

(duplexing). Two options are available:

●

AUTO : Enables Smart

Duplexing, which instructs the product not to process both sides if the second side is blank. Letterhead and prepunched paper types are exceptions. This can improve print speed.

●

YES : Disables Smart

Duplexing and forces the duplexer to flip the sheet of paper even if it is printed on only one side.

NOTE: This option is available only for models that have automatic duplexing.

Select the ALTERNATE setting if you are having trouble aligning images on preprinted forms.

Reduces power consumption when the product has been inactive for the selected period.

NOTE: The SLEEP MODE setting in the RESETS menu must be on.

Tools for troubleshooting 331

Item

WAKE TIME

OPTIMUM SPEED/ENERGY

USAGE

DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS

PERSONALITY

CLEARABLE WARNINGS

Sub-item

Values

OFF *

CUSTOM

AUTO *

PCL

PDF

JOB *

FASTER FIRST PAGE

SAVE ENERGY

SAVE MORE ENERGY

SAVE MOST ENERGY

Range is –10 through 10.

Description

Select the CUSTOM option to configure the daily wake time for the product to avoid warm-up or calibration time. Select a day of the week, set the wake time for that day, and then choose whether the wake time should be applied to all days of the week.

Controls the fuser cool down behavior.

FASTER FIRST PAGE : The fuser maintains power and the first page processes faster for any new job that is sent to the product.

SAVE ENERGY : The fuser reduces power when it is idle.

SAVE MORE ENERGY : The fuser reduces more power than the

SAVE ENERGY option.

SAVE MOST ENERGY : The fuser is turned off and it gradually cools to room temperature. The SAVE

MOST ENERGY option takes the longest time to print the first page.

Sets the brightness of the control panel display. The default is 0 . This item also controls the viewing angle at which the display is visible.

Sets the default personality to automatic switching, PCL, PDF, or

PS modes.

Sets whether a warning is cleared on the control panel or when another job is sent.

● JOB : The warning message disappears at the end of the job.

●

ON : The warning message remains until you press the

OK button.

332 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Item

AUTO CONTINUE

Sub-item

JAM RECOVERY

RAM DISK

LANGUAGE

Values

OFF

ON *

AUTO

OFF

AUTO

OFF

A listing of available languages appears.

Description

Determines product behavior when the system generates an

Auto Continuable error.

●

ON : Allows the product to continue printing.

●

OFF : Stops the product from printing until the error is cleared by the user.

Sets whether the product will attempt to reprint pages after a jam. If you select AUTO , the product reprints pages if enough memory is available for full-speed two-sided printing.

Sets how the RAM disk feature is configured. This is only available if there is no hard disk installed and the printer has at least 8 MB of memory.

If the AUTO setting is enabled, the product determines the optimal

RAM disk size based on the amount of available memory.

If the OFF setting is enabled, the

RAM disk is disabled, but a minimal RAM disk is still active.

Sets the language. The default language is ENGLISH .

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 333

I/O menu

Items on the I/O (input/output) menu affect the communication between the product and the computer.

If the product contains an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure basic networking parameters by using this submenu. You can also configure these and other parameters through HP Web Jetadmin or the embedded Web server.

For more information on these options, see the product user guide.

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the I/

O menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Item

I/O TIMEOUT

Sub-item Values

Range: 5 - 300

Description

Allows you to set the product I/O

TIMEOUT in seconds. The default is 15 seconds.

Use this setting to adjust timeout for the best performance. If data from other ports appears in the middle of your print job, increase the timeout value.

EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU See the next table for a list of options.

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu

Item Sub-item Sub-item

INFORMATION PRINT SEC PAGE

TCP/IP

HOST NAME

ENABLE

Sub-item

YES *

ON *

OFF

Description

YES : Prints a page that contains the current security settings on the HP Jetdirect print server.

NO : A security settings page is not printed.

ON : Enable the TCP/IP protocol.

OFF : Disable the TCP/IP protocol.

An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, used to identify the product. This name is listed on the HP Jetdirect configuration page.

The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address.

334 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item

IPV4 SETTINGS

Sub-item

CONFIG METHOD

MANUAL

SETTINGS

DEFAULT IP

DHCP RELEASE

Sub-item

BOOTP

DHCP *

AUTO IP

MANUAL

IP ADDRESS

SUBNET MASK

DEFAULT

GATEWAY

AUTO IP

LEGACY

NO *

YES

Description

Specifies the method that TCP/IPv4 parameters will be configured on the

HP Jetdirect print server.

Use BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic configuration from a BootP server.

Use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration

Protocol) for automatic configuration from a

DHCPv4 server. If selected and a DHCP lease exists, DHCP RELEASE and DHCP

RENEW menus are available to set DHCP lease options.

Use AUTO IP for automatic link-local IPv4 addressing. An address in the form

169.254.x.x is assigned automatically.

If you set this option to MANUAL , use the

MANUAL SETTINGS menu to configure

TCP/IPv4 parameters.

(Available only if CONFIG METHOD is set to

MANUAL ) Configure parameters directly from the product control panel:

IP ADDRESS : The unique IP address

(n.n.n.n) of the product, where n is a value from 0 to 255.

SUBNET MASK : The subnet mask (n.n.n.n) for the product, where n is a value from 0 to

255.

DEFAULT GATEWAY : The IP address of the gateway or router used for communications with other networks.

Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP).

NOTE: This feature assigns a static IP address that might interfere with a managed network.

AUTO IP : A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x

is set.

LEGACY : The address 192.0.0.192 is set, consistent with older HP Jetdirect products.

This menu appears if CONFIG METHOD is set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.

NO : The current DHCP lease is saved.

YES : The current DHCP lease and the leased

IP address are released.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 335

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item

IPV6 SETTINGS

Sub-item

DHCP RENEW

PRIMARY DNS

SECONDARY DNS

ENABLE

ADDRESS

Sub-item

NO *

YES

OFF *

MANUAL

SETTINGS

●

ENABLE

ADDRESS

DHCPV6 POLICY ROUTER

SPECIFIED

ROUTER

UNAVAILABLE *

ALWAYS

PRIMARY DNS

SECONDARY DNS

Description

This menu appears if CONFIG METHOD is set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.

NO : The print server does not request to renew the DHCP lease.

YES : The print server requests to renew the current DHCP lease.

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a Primary

DNS Server.

Specify the IP address (n.n.n.n) of a

Secondary Domain Name System (DNS)

Server.

Use this item to enable or disable IPv6 operation on the print server.

OFF : IPv6 is disabled.

ON : IPv6 is enabled.

Use this item to enable and manually configure a TCP/IPv6 address.

ENABLE : Choose ON to enable manual configuration, or OFF to disable manual configuration. The default is OFF .

ADDRESS : Use this item to type a 32 hexadecimal digit IPv6 node address that uses the colon hexadecimal syntax.

ROUTER SPECIFIED : The stateful autoconfiguration method to be used by the print server is determined by a router. The router specifies whether the print server obtains its address, its configuration information, or both from a DHCPv6 server.

ROUTER UNAVAILABLE : If a router is not available, the print server should attempt to obtain its stateful configuration from a

DHCPv6 server.

ALWAYS : Whether or not a router is available, the print server always attempts to obtain its stateful configuration from a

DHCPv6 server.

Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a primary DNS server that the print server should use.

Use this item to specify an IPv6 address for a secondary DNS server that the print server should use.

336 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item Sub-item

PROXY SERVER

IPX/SPX

PROXY PORT

IDLE TIMEOUT

ENABLE

FRAME TYPE

APPLETALK

DLC/LLC

SECURITY

ENABLE

SECURE WEB

Sub-item Description

Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in the product. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security, for those clients.

To specify a proxy server, enter its IPv4 address or fully-qualified domain name. The name can be up to 255 octets.

For some networks, you might need to contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address.

Type the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535.

IDLE TIMEOUT : The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout).

ON *

OFF

AUTO *

EN_8023

ON : Enable the IPX/SPX protocol.

OFF : Disable the IPX/SPX protocol.

Selects the frame-type setting for your network.

AUTO : Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected.

EN_II

EN_8022

EN_SNAP

EN_8023 , EN_II , EN_8022 , and EN_SNAP are frame-type selections for Ethernet networks.

Configures an AppleTalk network.

ON *

OFF

ON *

OFF

ON : Enable the DLC/LLC protocol.

OFF : Disable the DLC/LLC protocol.

HTTPS REQUIRED *

HTTPS OPTIONAL

For configuration management, specify whether the embedded Web server will accept communications using HTTPS

(Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and

HTTPS.

HTTPS REQUIRED : For secure, encrypted communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The print server will appear as a secure site.

HTTPS OPTIONAL : Access using either

HTTP or HTTPS is permitted.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 337

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item

IPSEC

802.1X

RESET SECURITY

DIAGNOSTICS EMBEDDED TESTS

Sub-item

LAN HW TEST

HTTP TEST

Sub-item

KEEP

DISABLE *

RESET

KEEP

YES

NO *

Description

Specify the IPSec status on the print server.

KEEP : IPSec status remains the same as currently configured.

DISABLE : IPSec operation on the print server is disabled.

Specify whether the 802.1X settings on the print server are reset to the factory defaults.

RESET : The 802.1X settings are reset to the factory defaults.

KEEP : The current 802.1X settings are maintained.

Specify whether the current security settings on the print server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.

YES : Security settings are reset to factory defaults.

NO : The current security settings are maintained.

This menu provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems.

Embedded tests help to identify whether a network fault is internal or external to the product. Use an embedded test to check hardware and communication paths on the print server. After you select and enable a test and set the execution time, you must select

EXECUTE to initiate the test.

Depending on the execution time, a selected test runs continuously until either the product is turned off, or an error occurs and a diagnostic page is printed.

CAUTION: Running this embedded test will erase your TCP/IP configuration.

This test performs an internal loopback test.

An internal loopback test will send and receive packets only on the internal network hardware. There are no external transmissions on your network.

Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.

This test checks operation of HTTP by retrieving predefined pages from the product, and tests the embedded Web server.

Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.

338 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item Sub-item

SNMP TEST

Sub-item

YES

NO *

DATA PATH TEST YES

NO *

SELECT ALL

TESTS

EXECUTION TIME

[H]

YES

NO *

PING TEST

EXECUTE YES

NO *

DEST TYPE

DEST IPV4

DEST IPV6

PACKET SIZE

IPV4

IPV6

TIMEOUT

COUNT

Description

This test checks operation of SNMP communications by accessing predefined

SNMP objects on the product.

Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.

This test helps to identify data path and corruption problems on an HP postscript level

3 emulation product. It sends a predefined PS file to the product, However, the test is paperless; the file will not print.

Select YES to choose this test, or NO to not choose it.

Use this item to select all available embedded tests.

Select YES to choose all tests. Select NO to select individual tests.

Use this item to specify the length of time (in hours) that an embedded test will be run. You can select a value from 0 to 24 hours. If you select zero (0), the test runs indefinitely until an error occurs or the product is turned off.

Data gathered from the HTTP, SNMP, and

Data Path tests is printed after the tests have completed.

NO : Do not initiate the selected tests.

YES : Initiate the selected tests.

This test is used to check network communications. This test sends link-level packets to a remote network host, then waits for an appropriate response. To run a ping test, set the following items:

Specify whether the target product is an IPv4 or IPv6 node.

Type the IPv4 address.

Type the IPv6 address.

Specify the size of each packet, in bytes, to be sent to the remote host. The minimum is

64 (default) and the maximum is 2048.

Specify the length of time, in seconds, to wait for a response from the remote host. The default is 1 and the maximum is 100.

Specify the number of ping test packets to send for this test. Select a value from 0 to 100.

The default is 4. To configure the test to run continuously, select 0.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 339

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item Sub-item

PRINT RESULTS

Sub-item

YES

NO *

PING RESULTS

EXECUTE YES

NO *

PACKETS SENT

PACKETS

RECEIVED

PERCENT LOST

RTT MIN

RTT MAX

RTT AVERAGE

PING IN

PROGRESS

YES

NO *

Description

If the ping test was not set for continuous operation, you can choose to print the test results. Select YES to print results. If you select NO , results are not printed.

Specify whether to initiate the ping test.

Select YES to initiate the test, or NO to not run the test.

Use this item to view the ping test status and results using the control panel display. You can select the following items:

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) sent to the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. The default is

Shows the number of packets (0 - 65535) received from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. The default is 0.

Shows the percent (0 to 100) of ping test packets that were sent with no response from the remote host since the most recent test was initiated or completed. The default is 0.

Shows the minimum detected roundtrip-time

(RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. The default is 0.

Shows the maximum detected roundtrip-time

(RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. The default is 0.

Shows the average round-trip-time (RTT), from 0 to 4096 milliseconds, for packet transmission and response. The default is 0.

Shows whether a ping test is in progress.

YES indicates a test in progress, and NO indicates that a test completed or was not run.

340 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-13 Embedded Jetdirect menu (continued)

Item Sub-item Sub-item

REFRESH

LINK SPEED

Sub-item

YES

NO *

AUTO *

10T HALF

10T FULL

100TX HALF

100TX FULL

100TX AUTO

1000T FULL

Description

When viewing the ping test results, this item updates the ping test data with current results. Select YES to update the data, or

NO to maintain the existing data. However, a refresh automatically occurs when the menu times out or you manually return to the main menu.

The link speed and communication mode of the print server must match the network. The available settings depend on the product and installed print server. Select one of the following link configuration settings:

CAUTION: If you change the link setting, network communications with the print server and network product might be lost.

AUTO : The print server uses autonegotiation to configure itself with the highest link speed and communication mode allowed. If auto-negotiation fails, either

100TX HALF or 10T HALF is set depending on the detected link speed of the hub/switch port. (A 1000T half-duplex selection is not supported.)

10T HALF : 10 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

10T FULL : 10 Mbps, full-duplex operation.

100TX HALF : 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.

100TX FULL : 100 Mbps, full-duplex operation.

100TX AUTO : Limits auto-negotiation to a maximum link speed of 100 Mbps.

1000T FULL : 1000 Mbps, full-duplex operation.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 341

Resets menu

The RESETS menu allows you to reset factory settings, and disable or enable sleep mode.

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

RESETS menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Item

RESTORE FACTORY

SETTINGS

Sub-item Values

CALIBRATION RESET

SLEEP MODE OFF

ON *

Description

Allows you to clear the page buffer, remove all perishable personality data, reset the printing environment, and return most settings to factory defaults.

Resets calibration values on the formatter.

If SLEEP MODE is OFF , the product will never enter power save mode and no asterisk will appear next to any item when the user enters the menu item

SLEEP DELAY .

Diagnostics menu

The DIAGNOSTICS menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the product.

To display: Press the Home button , and then select the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

NOTE: Values that have an asterisk (*) are the factory-default values. Some menu items have no default.

Item

PRINT EVENT LOG

SHOW EVENT LOG

PQ TROUBLESHOOTING

PRINT DIAGNOSTICS

PAGE

DISABLE CARTRIDGE

CHECK

Sub-item Values Description

Prints a report containing the last

50 entries in the product’s event log, starting with the most recent.

Displays the last 50 events, starting with the most recent.

Prints a page that includes instructions, pages for each color, a demo page, and a configuration page. These pages can help isolate print-quality problems.

Prints a page that can assist in diagnosing product problems.

This item allows you to remove a print cartridge to help determine which cartridge is the source of a problem.

342 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Item

PAPER PATH SENSORS

PAPER PATH TEST

MANUAL SENSOR TEST

PRINT/STOP TEST

Sub-item

PRINT TEST PAGE

SOURCE

DUPLEX

COPIES

MANUAL SENSOR TEST

COMPONENT TEST A list of available components appears.

Values Description

Performs a test on each of the product’s sensors to determine if they are working correctly and displays the status of each sensor.

Tests the paper-handling features of the product, such as the configuration of the trays.

Generates a page for testing the paper-handling features. You must define the path for the test in order to test specific paper paths.

Specifies whether the test page is printed from all trays or from a specific tray.

ALL TRAYS

TRAY 1

TRAY 2 *

TRAY 3

TRAY 4

TRAY 5

OFF

Determines whether the duplexer is included in the test.

NOTE: This option is available only for models that have an automatic duplexer.

Determines how many pages should be sent from the specified source as part of the test.

1 *

100

500

Range is 0 - 60,000 milliseconds.

The default is 0.

Performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are operating correctly.

Performs additional tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are operating correctly.

Activate individual parts independently to isolate noise, leaking, and other hardware issues.

Isolates print quality faults more accurately by stopping the product in mid-print cycle, which allows you to see where the image begins to degrade. This causes a jam message that might need to be manually cleared. A service representative should perform this test.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 343

Item

COLOR BAND TEST

Sub-item

PRINT TEST PAGE

COPIES

Values Description

Prints a color band test page that is used to identify arcing in the highvoltage power supply.

Range is 1 to 30. The default value is 1.

Specify how many copies of the internal page are printed.

Service menu

The SERVICE menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized

service personnel. See Service mode functions on page 420 .

Product PINs

●

HP Color LaserJet CP4025: 11402509

● HP Color LaserJet CP4525: 11452509

344 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Interpret control-panel messages

Control-panel message types

Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the product.

Message type

Status messages

Warning messages

Error messages

Description

Status messages reflect the current state of the product. They inform you of normal product operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the product changes. Whenever the product is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the status message Ready appears if the product is online.

Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the

Ready or status messages and remain until OK is pressed. Some warning messages are clearable.

If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB on the product CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, the next print job clears these messages.

Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing a jam.

Some error messages are auto-continuable. If AUTO-CONTINUE is set on the menus, the product will continue normal operation after an auto-continuable error message appears for 10 seconds.

NOTE: Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the stop button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.

Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a product failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the product off and then on. These messages are not affected by the AUTO-CONTINUE setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.

Control-panel messages

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages

Description Recommended action

10.41.00 UNSUPPORTED SUPPLY IN USE

10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR

An unsupported supply is installed.

If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit .

The product cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or a memory tag is missing from a print cartridge.

Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new print cartridge.

XX values

●

00 = Memory tag memory error

●

10 = Memory tag missing

YY values

● 00 = Black

●

01 = Cyan

● 02 = Magenta

●

03 = Yellow

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 345

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

11.XX Internal clock error

To continue press OK

13.XX.YY FUSER AREA JAM

13.XX.YY FUSER WRAP JAM

13.XX.YY JAM ABOVE TOP OUTPUT BIN

13.XX.YY JAM IN LOWER RIGHT DOOR

13.XX.YY JAM IN RIGHT DOOR

13.XX.YY JAM IN TOP OUTPUT BIN

The product real-time clock has experienced an error.

●

XX = 01; clock battery failed

Whenever the product is turned off and then turned on again, set the time and date at the

control panel. See System setup menu on page 329 .

● XX = 02; real time clock failed If the error persists, you might need to replace the formatter.

A jam has occurred in the fuser area.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

A jam has occurred in the fuser.

A jam has occurred in the output area.

A jam has occurred in the lower-right door

(Tray 3).

A jam has occurred in the duplex and feed area inside the right door.

A jam has occurred in the top output bin.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

Clear jams in the output bin area on page 390 .

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

Clear jams in the lower right door (Tray 3, 4, or 5) on page 393 .

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

Clear jams in the output bin area on page 390 .

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 1

13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY <X>

13.XX.YY JAMS IN RIGHT DOOR

20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY

To continue press OK

21.X INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD

FONTS/DATA

22 EIO X BUFFER OVERFLOW

To continue press OK

A jam has occurred in Tray 1.

A jam has occurred in the indicated tray.

A jam has occurred in the fuser area.

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

Clear jams in Tray 1 on page 390 .

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

Clear jams in Tray 2 or optional Trays 3, 4, or

5 on page 392 .

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

For instructions on clearing the jam, see

The product received more data than can fit in the available memory. You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or complex graphics.

Press the OK button to print the transferred data (some data might be lost), and then simplify the print job or install additional memory.

Insufficient memory to process the print job.

Install additional memory in the product.

Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An incorrect communications protocol might be in use.

Press the OK button to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)

Check the host configuration.

346 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

22 EMBEDDED I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW

To continue press OK

22 PARALLEL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW

To continue press OK

22 PARALLEL SERIAL BUFFER

OVERFLOW

To continue press OK

22 USB I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW

To continue press OK

40 EIO X BAD TRANSMISSION

To continue press OK

Too much data was sent to the embedded

HP Jetdirect print server.

Press the OK button to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)

Check the host configuration.

The product's parallel buffer has overflowed.

Press the OK button to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)

Check the host configuration.

The product's serial buffer has overflowed.

Press the OK button to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)

Check the host configuration.

The product's USB buffer has overflowed.

Press the OK button to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)

Check the host configuration.

The connection between the product and the

EIO card in the specified slot has been broken.

Press the OK button to clear the error message and continue printing.

Try to reinstall the EIO card.

A temporary printing error has occurred.

Press the OK button to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)

40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD TRANSMISSION

To continue press OK

41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY <X>

LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]

To use another tray press OK

41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY <X>

LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]

To use another tray press OK

This message appears even though the tray is loaded with the correct paper size.

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette media size switch is functioning properly.

Reconnect the cassette media size switch intermediate connector J57, and connector J107 on the DC controller

PCA.

Replace the lifter assembly.

This message appears even though the tray is loaded with the correct paper size.

Reconnect the media sensor intermediate connector J77, and connector J131 on the DC controller

PCA.

Replace the registration assembly.

41.7 ERROR

To continue press OK

48.01 TRANSFER UNIT ERROR

Printer error

●

X = 2; beam detected misprint

● X = 7; media transport error

The transfer belt has dislocated during printing.

Turn the product off, and then on.

Turn product off then on.

If the message persists, remove and reinstall the transfer unit.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 347

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

A firmware error has occurred.

49.XXXX ERROR

To continue turn off then on

50.1 FUSER ERROR

50.2 FUSER ERROR

Low fuser temperature.

Fuser warm-up failure

This error can be caused by corrupted print jobs, software applications issues, nonproduct specific printer drivers, poor-quality

USB or network cables, bad network connections or incorrect configurations, invalid firmware operations, or unsupported accessories.

Turn the product off and then on.

If the error returns, check the following items:

◦

The error might be caused by a network connectivity problem, such as a bad interface cable, a bad USB port, or an invalid network configuration setting.

◦ The error might be caused by the print job, such as an invalid printer driver, a problem with the software application, or a problem with the file you are printing.

◦

Upgrading the product firmware might help resolve the error. See the product user guide for more information.

Remove the fuser and any residual paper.

Check connector J50 between the fuser and the product. If either is damaged, replace the connector or fuser. See

fuser. See Fuser on page 85 .

Reinstall the fuser.

Check the connector J50 between the fuser and the product. If either is damaged, replace the connector or

Reconnect the connectors J160 and

J162 on the DC controller PCA and connector J25 on the power line between the low voltage power supply and fuser.

Replace the wire harness that connects the fuser.

Replace the fuser. See

Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 157

If the error persists, replace the lowvoltage power supply. See

348 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description

50.3 FUSER ERROR

50.4 FUSER ERROR

50.5 FUSER ERROR

50.7 FUSER ERROR

50.8 FUSER ERROR

Recommended action

High fuser temperature

Drive circuit fault

The incorrect fuser was installed.

Fuser pressure-release mechanism failure

Low fuser temperature.

Reinstall the fuser. Check connector J50 between the fuser and the product. If either is damaged, replace the connector or fuser.

See

Low-voltage power supply (LVPS) on page 157

If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. See

Low-voltage power supply

(LVPS) on page 157 .

Check the power source. Make sure the power source meets product requirements.

Reconnect the connector J150 on the

DC controller PCA.

If the message persists, replace the lowvoltage power supply. See

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

Open the right door.

Remove the incompatible fuser.

Install the correct fuser.

Close the right door.

Reconnect the fuser-pressure release sensor intermediate connector J60, and connector J128 on the DC controller

PCA.

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the fuser pressure-release sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the fuser pressure-release sensor.

Check the fuser pressure-release sensor flag. If it is damaged, replace the fuser.

Run the fuser pressure-release drive test in actuator drive mode to verify that the fuser motor is functioning properly.

If it is not, replace the fuser motor. See

Fuser motor on page 200

If the message persists, replace the fuser. See

Remove the fuser and any residual paper.

Check connector J50 between the fuser and the product. If either is damaged, replace the connector or fuser. See

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 349

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

50.9 FUSER ERROR

50.X FUSER ERROR

51.XY ERROR

To continue turn off then on

52.XY ERROR

To continue turn off then on

High fuser temperature.

Reinstall the fuser. Check the connector J50 between the fuser and the product. If either is damaged, replace the connector or fuser.

See

A fuser error has occurred.

If the error persists, replace the low-voltage power supply. See

Low-voltage power supply

(LVPS) on page 157

Make sure you have the correct fuser. Reseat the fuser. Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

A product error has occurred.

●

51.20 ERROR: black laser error

● 51.21 ERROR: cyan laser error

●

51.22 ERROR: magenta laser error

● 51.23 ERROR: yellow laser error

A product error has occurred.

●

52.00 ERROR: Scanner startup error

●

52.20 ERROR: Scanner rotation error

Error requires that the product be turned off then on.

●

52.00 ERROR: If the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) does not start up, reconnect connector J71 on the laser driver PCA and connector J112 on the

DC controller PCA. If the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) does not start up, reconnect connector J72 on the laser driver PCA and connector J112 on the

DC controller PCA. If the message persists, replace the appropriate laser/ scanner assembly. See

Laser/ scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 190 .

●

52.20 ERROR: If the laser/scanner assembly (Y/M) does not rotate, reconnect connector J71 on the laser driver PCA and connector J112 on the

DC controller PCA. If the laser/scanner assembly (C/Bk) does not rotate, reconnect connector J72 on the laser driver PCA and connector J112 on the

DC controller PCA. If the message persists, replace the appropriate laser/ scanner assembly. See

Laser/ scanner assembly (C/Bk) on page 190 .

Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

54.XX ERROR

To continue turn off then on

55.XX.YY DC CONTROLLER ERROR

To continue turn off then on

The print engine is not communicating with the formatter (XX = 01; DC controller memory error).

Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

If the error persists, replace the DC controller

PCA. See

DC controller PCA only on page 155 .

350 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

56.X ERROR

To continue turn off then on

57.03 ERROR

To continue turn off then on

A temporary printing error has occurred (XX

= 01; illegal input).

Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

Cartridge fan (FM2) is defective.

57.04 ERROR

To continue turn off then on

57.06 ERROR

To continue turn off then on

Power-supply fan (FM1) is defective.

Exhaust fan (FM4) is defective.

A temporary printing error has occurred.

Reconnect the cartridge fan connector

J65, connector J263 on the high-voltage power supply lower, and connector J114 on the DC controller PCA.

Turn the product off, and then on.

Measure the voltage between connectors J263-16 and J263-18 on the high-voltage power supply lower immediately after the product is turned on. If the voltage changes from 0 V to approximately 24 V, replace the cartridge fan. See

Cartridge fan and environmental sensor on page 137 .

Reconnect the cartridge fan connector

J153 on the DC controller PCA.

Turn the product off, and then on.

Measure the voltage between connectors J153-1 and J153-3 on DC controller PCA immediately after the product is turned on. If the voltage changes from 0 V to approximately 24

V, replace the power-supply fan. See

Power-supply fan on page 152 .

Reconnect the cartridge fan connector

J79, connector J264 on the high-voltage power supply lower, and connector J114 on the DC controller PCA.

Turn the product off, and then on.

Measure the voltage between connectors J264-1 and J264-3 on the high-voltage power supply lower immediately after the product is turned on. If the voltage changes from 0 V to approximately 24 V, replace the exhuast

fan. See Exhaust fan and fan duct on page 169 .

Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

57.XX ERROR

To continue turn off then on

58.XX ERROR

To continue turn off then on

A temporary printing error has occurred.

●

58.03 ERROR: DC controller PCA is defective.

●

58.04 ERROR: Low-voltage power supply is defective.

●

58.03 ERROR: Turn the product off, and then turn the product on. If the message persists, replace the DC controller PCA.

See

the low-voltage power supply. See Lowvoltage power supply (LVPS) on page 157 .

●

58.04 ERROR: Reconnect the connector J150 on the DC controller

PCA. If the message persists, replace

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 351

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description

59.20 ERROR

59.30 ERROR

59.40 ERROR

59.50 ERROR

59.51 ERROR

59.52 ERROR

59.53 ERROR

59.60 ERROR

59.61 ERROR

59.62 ERROR

Recommended action

Motor rotation error.

Fuser motor startup error

Fuser motor rotation error

Black image drum motor startup error

Cyan image drum motor startup error

Magenta image drum motor startup error

Yellow image drum motor startup error

Black image drum motor rotation error

Cyan image drum motor rotation error

Magenta image drum motor rotation error

Perform the motor component tests in the

DIAGNOSTICS menu.

Reconnect the connector J13 of the fuser motor and the connector J123 on the DC controller PCA. Perform the fuser motor component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

If the message persists, replace the fuser motor. See

Fuser motor on page 200 .

Perform the fuser motor component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. If the message persists, replace the fuser motor. See

Fuser motor on page 200 .

Reconnect the connector J15 of the black drum motor and the connector J121 on the

DC controller PCA. Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

If the message persists, replace the black drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Reconnect the connector J16 of the cyan drum motor and the connector J121 on the

DC controller PCA. Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

If the message persists, replace the cyan drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Reconnect the connector J17 of the magenta drum motor and the connector J120 on the

DC controller PCA. Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

If the message persists, replace the magenta drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Reconnect the connector J18 of the yellow drum motor and the connector J120 on the

DC controller PCA. Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu.

If the message persists, replace the yellow drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. If the message persists, replace the black drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. If the message persists, replace the cyan drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. If the message persists, replace the magenta drum motor.

See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

352 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description

59.63 ERROR

59.90 ERROR

59.A0 ERROR

59.BO CLEANING MOTOR ERROR

REPLACE TONER COLLECTION UNIT

59.C0 ERROR

Recommended action

Yellow image drum motor rotation error

ITB motor startup error

ITB motor rotation error.

The residual-toner feed motor has failed.

Developer alienation motor rotation error

Perform the drum-motors component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. If the message persists, replace the yellow drum motor. See

Yellow, magenta, cyan, and black drum motors on page 199 .

Reconnect the connector J14 of the ITB motor and the connector J140 on the DC controller PCA. Perform the ITB motor drive component test to verify that the ITB motor is functioning properly. If the message persists,

replace the ITB motor. See ITB motor on page 202 .

Use the component test to activate the ITB motor. If the motor does not function, replace the motor. See

ITB motor on page 202 .

Check the toner collection unit. If the unit is full, replace it.

NOTE: Toner can clog the feed motor if the toner collection unit is full.

Reconnect the residual-toner feed motor connector J63 and connector

J155 on the DC controller PCA.

Replace the residual-toner feed motor.

See

Residual-toner-feed motor on page 133 .

Reconnect intermediate connector J87 of the developing disengagement sensor, connector J112 on the DC controller PCA, connector J38 of the developing disengagement motor, and the connector J261 on the high-voltage power supply D PCA.

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the developing disengagement sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace

the main-drive assembly. See Maindrive assembly on page 203 .

Run the developing unit disengagement drive test to verify that the disengagement mechanism is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the developing disengagement motor.

See

Developing-disengagement motor on page 168 .

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 353

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description

59.F0 ERROR

60.02 ERROR

60.03 ERROR

Recommended action

Transfer alienation failure

Tray 2 is not lifting correctly.

Tray 3 is not lifting correctly.

Verify that the ITB is installed.

Reconnect the primary-transfer disengagement sensor J19, and connector J128 on the DC controller

PCA .

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the primary transfer disengagement sensor is functioning properly. If not, replace the primary transfer disengagement sensor.

Perform the alienation drive component test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. If not, replace the fuser motor. See

Fuser motor on page 200 .

Reconnect connector J115 on the DC controller PCA and the intermediate connector J58.

Run the sensor test in sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette media stack surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup

assembly. See Tray-pickup drive assembly on page 178 .

Reconnect connector J56 of the lifter motor. Also check J107 on the DC controller PCA.

If the message persists, replace the lifter drive assembly. See

Lifter-drive assembly on page 173 .

Reconnect connector J408 on the paper deck controller PCA and the intermediate connector J11.

Run the sensor test in sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette media stack surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup

assembly. See Pickup assembly

(optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

Reconnect connector J15 of the lifter motor. Also check J407 on the paper deck controller PCA.

If the message persists, replace the lifter drive assembly. See

Lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 230 .

354 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

60.04 ERROR Tray 4 is not lifting correctly.

60.05 ERROR

62 NO SYSTEM

To continue turn off then on

68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL

To continue press OK

Tray 5 is not lifting correctly.

The product has an internal problem.

Reconnect connector J406 on the paper deck controller PCA and the intermediate connector J21.

Run the sensor test in sensor monitor mode to verify that the cassette media stack surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly. See

Pickup assembly

(optional paper feeder) on page 226

Reconnect connector J24 of the lifter motor. Also check J405 on the paper deck controller PCA.

If the message persists, replace the lifter drive assembly. See

Lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 230 .

Reconnect the connector J403 on the paper deck controller PCA and the intermediate connector J31.

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the PD cassette media stack surface sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the middle pickup assembly. See

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

Reconnect the connector J34 of the lifter motor and the connector. Also check

J402 on the paper deck controller PCA.

If the message persists, replace the lifter drive assembly. See

Lifter-drive assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 230 .

Turn the product off and then on.

The product NVRAM is full. Some settings saved in the NVRAM might have been reset to the factory defaults. Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error occurred in permanent storage.

Press the OK button to clear the message. If the message is not cleared, turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

X values

●

0 = Internal memory

●

1 = Removable disk

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 355

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL

To continue press OK

The product NVRAM is failing to write.

Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error occurred in permanent storage.

Press the OK button to clear the message. If the message is not cleared, turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS

CHANGED

To continue press OK

X values

●

0 = Internal memory

●

1 = Removable disk

One or more product settings are invalid and have been reset to the factory-default settings. Printing can continue, but some unexpected functions might occur if an error occurred in permanent storage.

Press the OK button to clear the message. If the message is not cleared, turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

A temporary printing error occurred.

Turn the product off, and then turn the product on.

69.X ERROR

To continue turn off then on

79.XXXX ERROR An internal product error has occurred.

Turn the product off and then on.

To continue turn off then on

8X.YYYY EIO ERROR This message appears in English only. It indicates that the EIO card in slot X has failed.

Replace the EIO card.

8X.YYYY EMBEDDED JETDIRECT ERROR This message appears in English only. It indicates that the embedded HP Jetdirect card has failed.

<COLOR> CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

To continue press OK

ACCEPT BAD SIGNATURE?

Yes press OK

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

Order the indicated print cartridge.

The product is performing a remote firmware upgrade, and the code signature is invalid.

Download the correct firmware upgrade file for this product, and then reinstall the upgrade. See the product user guide for more information.

alternates with

ACCEPT BAD SIGNATURE?

No press

Access denied MENUS LOCKED

Action not currently available for tray x

Tray size cannot be ANY SIZE/ANY

CUSTOM

BAD OPTIONAL TRAY CONNECTION

The control-panel menu that you tried to select is currently locked.

Consult with the person who administers the product.

Duplex registration is not available when the size is set to ANY SIZE or ANY CUSTOM .

Configure the tray to a specific size, and then set the registration for that tray.

The optional tray is not connected correctly.

Turn the product off.

Remove and then reinstall the optional tray.

Reconnect the connectors for the tray.

If the problem persist, replace the connector for tray.

356 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

Bad Signature

Upgrade cancelled

BLACK CARTRIDGE LOW

LESS THAN XXXX PAGES

BLACK CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

PRINTING BLACK ONLY

BLACK CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

To continue press OK

Calibrating...

CALIBRATION RESET PENDING

Processing...

Canceling...

CARD SLOT <X> NOT FUNCTIONAL

The firmware upgrade code does not match the product signature.

Download the correct firmware upgrade file for this product, and then reinstall the upgrade. See the product user guide for more information.

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life. See

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. Estimated pages remaining is based upon the historical page coverage of this product.

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

estimated lives. See Print cartridges on page 74 .

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. The product has been configured to print using only black when the level of a color supply is very low. The actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

To stop printing black only, change the AT

VERY LOW menu item for Color Cartridges to a setting other than PRINT IN BLACK or replace the very low color cartridges.

Consider purchasing replacement cartridges so they are available when the installed cartridges have reached the end of their

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

Consider having a replacement print cartridge available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

Press the OK button to continue. If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge is empty. See

Configuration page on page 307 .)

Displays during calibration.

No action is necessary.

A calibration reset will occur when all jobs are processed.

To begin the reset sooner, cancel all jobs by pressing the Stop button .

The product is canceling the current job.

The compact flash card in slot <X> is not working correctly.

No action is necessary.

Remove the card from the slot indicated, and replace with a new card.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 357

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

The specified device has failed.

CARD SLOT DEVICE FAILURE

To clear press OK

CARD SLOT FILE OPERATION FAILED

To clear press OK

CARD SLOT FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

To clear press OK

CARD SLOT IS WRITE PROTECTED

To clear press OK

CARD SLOT NOT INITIALIZED

CHECKING PAPER PATH

CHECKING PRINTER

CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT

AVAILABLE

To continue press OK

CLEANING DISK <X>% COMPLETE

Do not power off

CLEANING...

CLEARING EVENT LOG

CLEARING PAPER PATH

CLOSE FRONT DOOR

A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to clear.

A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.

Press the OK button to clear.

The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.

Press the OK button to clear.

This file-storage component must be initialized before use.

The product is checking for possible paper jams.

The product is conducting an internal test.

A print job requested a product language

(personality) that is not available for this product. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.

The product is cleaning the hard disk or a compact flash disk.

Use the embedded Web server or HP Web

Jetadmin to initialize the component.

No action is necessary.

Print the job by using a printer driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the product (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. (See

Do not turn off. The product will automatically restart when cleaning is complete. Product functions are unavailable.

The product is performing an automatic cleaning cycle. Printing will continue after the cleaning is complete.

No action is necessary.

This message is displayed while the event log is cleared. The product will exit the menus once the event log has been cleared.

No action is necessary.

Check progress at the bottom of the display.

The product is attempting to eject jammed paper.

The front door of the product is open.

Close the door.

Run the switch test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the front-door switch is functioning properly.

Reconnect connector J45 on the front door switch and connector J129 on the

DC controller PCA.

Check the sensor flag on the front-door assembly. If it is damaged, replace the front-door assembly. See

Front-door assembly on page 107 .

358 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

CLOSE LOWER RIGHT DOOR

CLOSE RIGHT DOOR

COLLECTION UNIT ALMOST FULL

Cooling engine

Creating...

CLEANING PAGE

CYAN CARTRIDGE LOW

3 x 500 optional paper feeder only Close the door.

The right door on the optional paper feeder is open.

If the message appears when the door is closed:

Reconnect connector J19 of the PD right door switch and connector J147 on the controller PCA.

Check the right door sensor flag. If it is damaged, replace the right-door assembly. See

Right door (optional paper feeder) on page 220 .

A door on the right side of the product is open.

Close the door.

Run the switch test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the right-door switch is functioning properly.

Reconnect connectors J43 of the rightdoor switch and connector J147 on the

DC controller PCA.

If the message persists, check the right door sensor flag. If it is damaged, replace the right door. See

The toner collection unit is almost full. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the toner collection unit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

The product is cooling.

A cleaning page is being generated.

To continue printing, either press the OK button or replace the toner collection unit.

See

No action is necessary.

CYAN CARTRIDGE LOW

LESS THAN XXXX PAGES

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 359

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

CYAN CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

To continue press OK

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. See

print cartridge. See Print cartridges on page 74 .

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

Press the OK button to continue. If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the

The product is waiting for the command to print the last page.

Press the OK button to print the last page.

DATA RECEIVED

To print last page press OK

DATE/TIME = YYYY/MMMM/DD HH:MM

To change press OK

To skip press

The current date and time set for the product.

Press the OK button to set the date and time or press the stop button to skip setup.

Deleting private jobs

Deleting...

EIO <X> DISK INITIALIZING

EIO <X> DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL

EIO <X> DISK SPINNING UP

The product is deleting a private stored job.

No action is necessary.

The product is currently deleting the stored job.

No action is necessary.

The specified EIO disk device is initializing.

No action is necessary.

The EIO disk in slot <X> is not working correctly.

Turn the product off.

Remove the disk from the slot indicated.

Replace with a new disk.

Turn the product on.

EIO disk device in slot <X> is spinning up its platter. Jobs that require disk access must wait.

No action is necessary.

The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to clear.

EIO DEVICE FAILURE

To clear press OK

EIO FILE OPERATION FAILED

To clear press OK

EIO FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

To clear press OK

A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to clear.

A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.

Press the OK button to clear.

360 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

EIO IS WRITE PROTECTED

To clear press OK

EIO NOT INITIALIZED

The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.

Event log empty

EXPECTED DRIVE MISSING

FUSER KIT LOW

FUSER KIT VERY LOW

To continue press OK

Genuine HP supplies installed

HP SECURE DRIVE DISABLED

INCOMPATIBLE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE

INCOMPATIBLE FUSER

INCOMPATIBLE SUPPLIES

Press the OK button to clear.

This file-storage component must be initialized before use.

No product events are in the log.

Use the embedded Web server or HP Web

Jetadmin to initialize the component.

No action is necessary.

Insert the encrypted hard drive.

The product cannot find the encrypted hard drive.

The fuser kit is low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit. Consider purchasing a replacement fuser kit so it is available when the installed fuser kit has reached the end of its estimated life.

The fuser kit is very low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit.

The fuser kit is very low and the AT VERY

LOW menu for the fuser kit is set to PROMPT

TO CONTINUE . The product stops printing until you press the OK button or replace the fuser kit. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

Press the OK button to clear the message. If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit.

You have installed more than one new print cartridge that was manufactured by HP.

No action is necessary.

The drive has been encrypted for another product.

The indicated color print cartridge is not compatible with this product.

The incorrect fuser was installed.

Remove the drive or see the embedded Web server for more information.

Replace the print cartridge with one that is designed for this product.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

Open the right door.

Remove the incompatible fuser.

Install the correct fuser.

Close the right door.

Print cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The product cannot print with these supplies installed.

Press the OK button to identify the incompatible supplies. Install supplies that are designed for this product.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 361

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

Incorrect

Initializing

Initializing permanent storage

INSTALL <COLOR> CARTRIDGE

INSTALL FUSER

INSTALL SUPPLIES

INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT

INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD

FONTSDATA

Internal Disk Not Functional

LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]

The PIN is incorrect.

The product is starting.

Use the up arrow and down arrow buttons to enter the correct PIN.

No action is necessary. Please wait until the

Ready message appears on the display.

No action is necessary.

Displayed when the product is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized.

The print cartridge has been removed or has been installed incorrectly.

Replace or reinstall the print cartridge

correctly to continue printing. See Print cartridges on page 74 .

The fuser has been removed or installed incorrectly.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

Open the right door.

Install or adjust the fuser.

Close the right door.

More than one supply is missing or is installed incorrectly.

Press the OK button to identify which supplies need to be replaced. Press the OK button a second time for more information about the specific supply. Insert the supply item or make sure the installed supply item is fully seated.

The transfer unit has been removed or installed incorrectly.

Open right door.

Install the transfer unit.

Close the right door.

If the error persists, use the manual sensor test to check the ITB alienation

sensor (SR9). See Manual sensor test

(special-mode test) on page 246

. This sensor also detects the presence of the

ITB.

Reconnect the ITB alienation sensor connector J78, and the connector J127 on the DC controller PCA.

The product does not have enough memory to load the data (for example, fonts or macros) from the location specified.

To continue without this information, press the OK button . If the message persists, add more memory.

The internal disk is not working correctly.

Tray 1 is empty.

Replace the internal hard drive. See Hard drive on page 79 .

Load Tray 1 with the requested paper.

If the paper is already in the Tray 1, press the help button , and then press the OK button to print.

To use another tray, remove paper from Tray

1, and then press the OK button to continue.

362 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]

To continue press OK

LOAD TRAY 1 [TYPE] [SIZE]

To use another tray press OK

LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]

Media insert required in tray

LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]

Media insert required in tray

To use another tray press OK

LOAD TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]

To use another tray press OK

The indicated tray is loaded and configured for a type and size other than the one specified in the job.

If the correct paper is loaded, press the

OK button.

Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper and load the tray with the specified paper.

If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.

Tray 1 is empty and the other trays are available.

Confirm that the paper guides are in the correct position.

To use another tray, remove paper from the tray and then press the OK button.

If the correct paper is loaded, press the

OK button.

Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper and load the tray with the specified paper.

If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.

Confirm that the paper guides are in the correct position.

To use another tray, remove paper from the tray and then press the OK button.

This message appears even though there is media loaded in the tray.

Use the sensor test to verify that the cassette media present sensor is correctly functioning.

Reconnect the cassette media present sensor intermediate connector (J58) and connector J115 on the DC controller

PCA.

Make sure that the sensor flag on the media presence sensor is not damaged and moves freely.

This message appears when printing

100 x 150 mm (4 x 6 in) paper, which requires the HP postcard media insert in the indicated tray.

Install the HP postcard media insert in Tray 2, and load the requested paper.

If you do not have the HP postcard media insert, you can print 100 x 150 mm (4 x 6 in) paper from Tray 1 without the insert.

This message appears when printing

100 x 150 mm (4 x 6 in) paper, which requires the HP postcard media insert in the indicated tray.

Install the HP postcard media insert in the indicated tray.

This message appears when the indicated tray is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use.

Load the correct paper in the tray.

If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded.

It also appears when the tray is configured for a different paper type or size than the print job requires.

Otherwise, press the OK button to select another tray.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 363

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

LOADING PROGRAM <XX>

Do not power off

MAGENTA CARTRIDGE LOW

LESS THAN XXXX PAGES

MAGENTA CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

To continue press OK

MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>

To continue press OK

MANUALLY FEED <TYPE> <SIZE>

To use another tray press OK

Programs and fonts can be stored on the product’s file system and are loaded into

RAM when the product is turned on. The number XX specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded.

No action necessary. Do not turn the product off.

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. See

print cartridge. See Print cartridges on page 74 .

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

Press the OK button to continue. If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the

This message appears when MANUAL

FEED is selected and all trays are empty.

Load tray with requested paper. If paper is already in tray, press the help button to exit message and then press the OK button to print. To use another tray, clear paper from

Tray 1, press the help button to exit the message and then press the OK button.

This message appears when

FEED

MANUAL

is selected and Tray 1 is loaded.

Load tray with requested paper.

To override the message, press the OK button to use a type and size of paper that is available in another tray.

This message appears when MANUAL

FEED is selected, Tray 1 is not loaded, and other trays are available.

Load tray with requested paper. If paper is already in tray, press the help button to exit the message and then press the OK button to print. To use another tray, clear paper from

Tray 1, press the help button to exit the message and then press the OK button.

364 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK

Then press OK to print second side

MOVING SOLENOID

To exit press

The product has printed the first side of a manual duplex job and is waiting for the user to insert the output stack to print the second side.

Maintaining the same orientation, remove document from the output bin.

Flip document printed side up.

Load document in Tray 1.

The solenoid is moving as part of a component test.

Press the OK button to print.

No action is necessary.

MOVING SOLENOID AND MOTOR

To exit press

No job to cancel

The solenoid and a motor are moving as part of a component test.

No action is necessary.

NO STORED JOBS

NON HP SUPPLY INSTALLED

Paused

To return to Ready press

Performing upgrade

<X:YYY> % complete

Do not power off

Performing... COLOR BAND TEST

Performing... PAPER PATH TEST

Please wait

Powering off...

Printing <REPORT>

You have pressed the stop button but the product is not actively processing any jobs.

No action is necessary.

Displayed when the user enters the

RETRIEVE JOB menu and there are no jobs to retrieve.

No action is necessary.

The product is using a non-HP supply. This message appears for six seconds after you install a non-HP supply.

Any product repair required as a result of using non-HP or unauthorized supplies is not covered under warranty. HP cannot ensure the accuracy or the availability of certain features.

The product is paused, and there are no error messages pending at the display. The I/O continues receiving data until memory is full.

Press the stop button .

The product is in the process of upgrading the firmware.

Please wait until the upgrade is complete.

The color-band test is being performed.

No action is necessary.

The product is performing a paper path test.

No action is necessary.

The product is in the process of clearing data.

No action is necessary.

The product is shutting down.

Please wait until the product shuts down.

The product is printing an internal page. The product will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed.

No action is necessary.

Time has expired on the Print/Stop test.

Press the OK button to continue.

PRINTING STOPPED

To continue press OK

Printing...ENGINE TEST

Processing duplex job

Do not grab paper until job completes

The product is printing an engine test page.

No action necessary.

Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete.

Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes into the output bin. The message will disappear when the job is finished.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 365

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

Processing...

The product is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages. When paper motion begins, this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from.

No action is necessary.

The product is processing a cleaning page.

No action is necessary.

Processing...

CLEANING PAGE

Processing... copy <X> of <Y>

Processing... from tray <X>

The product is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed.

No action is necessary.

The product is actively processing a job from the designated tray.

No action is necessary.

The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to clear.

RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE

To clear press OK

RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED

To clear press OK

RAM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

To clear press OK

RAM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED

To clear press OK

RAM DISK NOT INITIALIZED

A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.

Press the OK button to clear.

A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.

Press the OK button to clear.

The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.

Press the OK button to clear.

Ready

This file-storage component must be initialized before use.

Use the HP Embedded Web Server or

HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the component.

The product is online and ready for data. No status or product attendance messages are pending at the display.

No action is necessary.

The product is online and ready.

No action is necessary.

Ready

IP ADDRESS

Ready Diagnostics mode

To exit press

Receiving Upgrade

The product is in Diagnostics mode.

A firmware upgrade is in progress.

To stop Diagnostic mode, press the Stop button .

Remove all print cartridges

To exit press

Remove at least one print cartridge

To exit press

The product is testing the transfer unit assembly.

The product is testing the print-cartridge motor.

Do not turn the product off until the product returns to Ready .

To perform the test, remove all the print cartridges. To cancel the test, press the stop button .

To perform the test, remove at least one print cartridge. To cancel the test, press the stop button .

REMOVE CARTRIDGE LOCKS The cartridge shipping locks were not removed before you turned the product on.

Open the front door.

Remove the orange cartridge locks.

366 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

REMOVE SHIPPING SHEET

REPLACE <COLOR> CARTRIDGE

REPLACE FUSER KIT

REPLACE SUPPLIES

REPLACE SUPPLIES - Using black only

The transfer unit shipping sheet was not removed before you turned the product on.

Open the right door.

Remove the shipping sheet.

Close the right door.

The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends.

Replace the specified color cartridge. See

Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu. For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

The product indicates when the fuser kit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The fuser kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

Open the right door.

Grasp the blue handles on both sides of the fuser and pull straight out to remove it.

Install the new fuser.

Close the right door.

Two or more supplies are at the estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium

Protection Warranty on that supply ends.

Press the OK button to see which supplies need to be replaced.

Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu. For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

You can configure the product to print using only black when the level of a color supply has reached its estimated end of life.

However, the color supply might still be able to produce acceptable print quality.

No user input is required for printing to continue in black. To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

The supply life remaining is used to determine if a supply is very low. The supply life remaining is an approximation only and varies depending on the types of documents printed and other factors.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the

SUPPLIES menu, see

MANAGE

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 367

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

REPLACE SUPPLY

Printing black only

REPLACE TONER COLLECTION UNIT

REPLACE TRANSFER KIT

At least one print cartridge has reached the very low condition and you have set the

COLOR CARTRIDGES

IN BLACK option.

items to the PRINT

No action is required for printing to continue in black. To continue printing in color, either replace the print cartridge or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

The supply life remaining is used to determine if a supply is very low. The supply life remaining is an approximation only and varies depending on the types of documents printed and other factors.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

Manage supplies menu on page 318 . This is not a recommended

The product indicates when a toner collection unit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement toner collection unit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The toner collection unit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After a toner collection unit has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that toner collection unit ends.

Replace the toner collection unit.

If you wish to have the toner collection unit operate past its estimated capacity, configure the product to continue printing by using the

MANAGE SUPPLIES menu. For more information about the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu, see

option because of the risk of overfilling the toner collection unit, which could result in the need to service the product.

The product indicates when a transfer kit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement transfer kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The transfer kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After a transfer kit has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that transfer kit ends.

Replace the transfer kit. Instructions are included with the transfer kit.

Request accepted please wait

Resend Upgrade

Resetting kit count

The product has accepted a request to print an internal page, but the current job must finish printing before the internal page will print.

The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully.

No action is necessary.

Attempt upgrade again.

No action is necessary.

You have selected the option to reset the count for a new supply item.

The product is restoring factory settings.

No action is necessary.

Restoring factory settings

Restoring...

The product is restoring settings.

Please wait until the process is complete.

RESTRICTED FROM PRINTING IN COLOR This message appears when color printing is disabled for the product or when it is disabled for a particular user or print job.

To enable color printing for the product, change the RESTRICT COLOR USE setting in the

ROM DISK DEVICE FAILURE The specified device has failed.

Press the OK button to clear.

To clear press OK

368 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

ROM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED

To clear press OK

ROM DISK FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

To clear press OK

ROM DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED

To clear press OK

Rotating <color> Motor

To exit press

Rotating Motor

To exit press

SANITIZING DISK <X>% COMPLETE

Do not power off

SIZE MISMATCH IN TRAY XX

Sleep mode on

A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.

The hard disk is being cleaned.

Press the OK button to clear.

A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.

Press the OK button to clear.

The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.

Press the OK button to clear.

A component test is in progress; the component selected is the <color> cartridge motor.

Press the stop button when ready to stop this test.

The product is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor.

Press the stop button when ready to stop this test.

Contact the network administrator.

The paper in the listed tray does not match the size specified for that tray.

Load the correct paper.

Verify the paper is positioned correctly.

Close the tray and verify that the control panel lists the correct paper size and type. Reconfigure the size and type if necessary.

The product is in sleep mode. A button press, receipt of printable data, or an error condition will clear this message.

No action is necessary.

The output bin is full.

Empty the bin and continue printing.

STANDARD TOP BIN FULL

Remove all paper from bin

SUPPLIES IN WRONG POSITION Two or more print-cartridge slots contain the wrong color print cartridge.

Install the correct color cartridge in each slot.

From left to right, the print cartridges should be installed in this order:

● Yellow

●

Magenta

● Cyan

●

Black

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 369

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

SUPPLIES LOW

PRINTING BLACK ONLY

SUPPLIES VERY LOW

PRINTING BLACK ONLY

SUPPLIES VERY LOW

To continue press OK

This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the low threshold. The product has been configured to print using only black when the level of a color supply is low. The actual supply life might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the very low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the very low threshold. The product has been configured to print using only black when the level of a color supply is very low. The actual supply life might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

370 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

TONER COLLECTION UNIT LOW

TONER COLLECTION UNIT VERY LOW

To continue press OK

TRANSFER KIT LOW

LESS THAN XXXX PAGES

TRANSFER KIT VERY LOW

To continue press OK

The toner collection unit is almost full. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the toner collection unit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

To continue printing, either press the OK button or replace the toner collection unit.

See

The toner collection unit is almost full. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the toner collection unit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

To continue printing, either press the OK button or replace the toner collection unit.

See

To continue printing, either press the OK button or replace the toner collection unit.

See

This message appears when the transfer kit reaches the low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the transfer kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

No action is necessary to continue. If the print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the transfer kit. Instructions are included with the new transfer kit.

The transfer kit is nearing the end of its estimated useful life. The actual supply life might vary. Estimated pages remaining is based upon the historical page coverage of this product. You do not need to replace the transfer kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

No action is necessary to continue. If the print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the transfer kit. Instructions are included with the new transfer kit.

This message appears when the transfer kit has reached the very low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the MANAGE SUPPLIES menu on the control panel.

For more information about ordering

For more information about the MANAGE

SUPPLIES menu, see

Parts and diagrams on page 425 .

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 371

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

TRAY <X> [TYPE] [SIZE]

To change size or type press OK

To accept settings press

TRAY <X> EMPTY [TYPE] [SIZE]

This message states the current type and size configuration of the tray.

To change size or type press the OK button.

To accept settings press the back arrow .

TRAY <X> OPEN

TRAY <X> OVERFILLED

Remove some paper

TRAY <X> OVERFILLED

To use another tray press OK

TRAY <X> SIZE = <Size>

Media insert required in tray

TYPE MISMATCH IN TRAY X

The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print.

The specified tray is open or not closed completely.

Refill the tray at a convenient time.

Close the tray.

NOTE: If this message appears and the lifter-base assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector on the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated.

Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray.

The tray is filled above the stack-height marking.

NOTE: If this message appears and the paper-pickup assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector at the back of the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated.

Remove enough paper so that the paper stack does not exceed the limit for the tray or press OK to use another tray.

NOTE: If this message appears and the paper-pickup assembly was removed or replaced, make sure that the connector at the back of the assembly is correctly connected and fully seated.

To use this size paper, install the media insert before loading the paper.

The product is set to print on a small paper size that requires the HP postcard mediainsert to be installed in this tray.

If you do not have the HP postcard media insert, 100 x 150 mm (4 x 6 in) paper can be printed from Tray 1 without the insert.

The specified tray contains a paper type that does not match the configured type.

The specified tray will not be used until this condition is addressed. Printing can continue from other trays.

Load the correct paper in the specified tray.

UNABLE TO COPY JOB

Verify the type configuration.

The product does not have enough memory to produce multiple original prints of this job.

One copy will be printed.

Add more memory to the product. See

Memory DIMM on page 81

UNABLE TO STORE JOB

Unsupported data on [FS] DIMM in slot x

To clear press OK

A job cannot be stored because of a memory or configuration problem.

Install additional memory in the product.

The data on the DIMM for the indicated file system is not a type that the product supports.

[FS] can be either a ROM or Flash file system.

Press the OK button to clear the message.

Replace the DIMM. See

Memory DIMM on page 81 .

372 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

UNSUPPORTED DRIVE INSTALLED

UNSUPPORTED SUPPLY IN USE

For help press

UNSUPPORTED SUPPLY INSTALLED

To continue press OK

A non-supported hard drive has been installed.

A non-supported supply has been installed.

The print cartridge is for a different HP product.

Turn off the product, remove the hard drive, and then turn on the product.

Turn off the product, remove the supply, and then turn on the product.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge.

USB ACCESSORY ERROR

USB ACCESSORY NOT FUNCTIONAL

USB ACCESSORY UNAVAILABLE

To clear press OK

USB NEEDS TOO MUCH POWER

Remove USB and turn off then on

For a list of supported print cartridges, see

This message appears when a connected

USB accessory draws too much power.

When this happens, the ACC port is disabled and printing stops.

Remove the USB accessory, and then restart the product

Use a USB accessory that uses less power or that contains its own power supply.

A USB accessory is not working correctly.

Turn product off.

Disconnect the USB accessory, and replace with a new USB accessory.

The USB accessory is currently unavailable.

To use the USB accessory, install the software for the USB accessory and turn the product off. Then, turn the product on with the accessory attached.

A USB accessory is drawing too much electrical current. Printing cannot continue.

The specified device has failed.

Remove the USB accessory, and then restart the product.

Use a USB accessory that uses less power or that contains its own power supply.

Press the OK button to clear.

USB STORAGE DEVICE FAILURE

To clear press OK

USB STORAGE FILE OPERATION FAILED A PJL file system command attempted to perform an illogical operation.

To clear press OK

USB STORAGE FILE SYSTEM IS FULL

To clear press OK

USB STORAGE IS WRITE PROTECTED

Press the OK button to clear.

A PJL file system command could not store something on the file system because the file system was full.

Press the OK button to clear.

The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it.

Press the OK button to clear.

To clear press OK

USB STORAGE NOT INITIALIZED

USE TRAY [X] [TYPE] [SIZE]

This file-storage component must be initialized before use.

The specified tray type and/or size is mismatched.

Use the embedded Web server or HP Web

Jetadmin to initialize the component.

Use the up arrow or down arrow to select the correct tray.

To continue press OK

USED SUPPLY INSTALLED

To continue press OK

Press the OK button to select the tray.

The print cartridge has been previously used.

If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit .

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 373

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

WAIT FOR PRINTER TO REINITIALIZE This message can appear for a variety of reasons:

●

The RAM DISK settings changed before the product has restarted.

No action is necessary.

● The product is restarting after changing external device modes.

●

Diagnostics has been exited.

● A new formatter has been installed with an old engine or a new engine has been installed with an old formatter.

The specified tray is lifting paper for feeding.

No action is necessary.

The product is coming out of Sleep mode.

No action is necessary.

WAITING FOR TRAY <X> TO LIFT

WARMING UP

WRONG CARTRIDGE IN <COLOR> SLOT The indicated slot for a print cartridge contains a cartridge that is not the correct color. From left to right, the print cartridges should be installed in this order:

●

Yellow

●

Magenta

●

Cyan

●

Black

YELLOW CARTRIDGE LOW

Remove the print cartridge from that slot, and install a cartridge that is the correct color.

The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.

YELLOW CARTRIDGE LOW

LESS THAN XXXX PAGES

374 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-14 Control-panel messages (continued)

Description Recommended action

YELLOW CARTRIDGE VERY LOW

To continue press OK

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. See

print cartridge. See Print cartridges on page 74 .

The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.

HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.

Press the OK button to continue. If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 375

Event log messages

This section describes messages that only appear in the event log. For additional numeric messages, see the control-panel message section in this manual. See

Control-panel messages on page 345 .

Print an event log

Use the event log to help diagnose and solve product problems.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight PRINT EVENT LOG , and then press the OK button to print the pages.

Show an event log

Use the control panel to view the event log.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight DIAGNOSTICS , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG , and then press the OK button to print the pages.

376 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Sample event log

Figure 3-56 Sample event log hp color LaserJet CP 4520 Series

Event Log Page

2 3 4 5 6 7

Product information

Event number

Date and time

Engine cycles

Event log code

Firmware version number

Description of personality

Clear the event log

Use the SERVICE menu to clear the event log.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight SERVICE , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight CLEAR EVENT LOG , and then press the OK button to print the pages.

ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 377

Event log message table

Event log message

10.XX.07

10.XX.08

10.XX.22

10.XX.23

10.XX.24

10.XX.26

10.XX.31

10.XX.33

10.XX.00

10.XX.01

10.XX.02

10.XX.03

10.XX.04

10.XX.05

10.XX.06

10.XX.34

10.XX99

10.50.23

10.70.23

10.70.24

10.81.00

13.01.00

13.02.00

13.03.00

13.04.00

13.05.00

13.06.00

13.08.00

13.11.00

13.12.00

378 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Description

Black toner cartridge

Cyan toner cartridge

Magenta toner cartridge

Yellow toner cartridge

Drum cartridge

Black drum cartridge

Cyan drum cartridge

Magenta drum cartridge

Yellow drum cartridge

Transfer belt

Fuser

Transport kit

Maintenance kit

Cleaning bottle

Transfer roller

Transfer kit

Unkown

Fuser kit life reset above replacement threshold.

Fuser kit

Transfer kit

Not printing black only

Comments

PAPER FEED 1, PAPER LATE JAM

PAPER FEED 1, PAPER STOPPED

JAM

PAPER FEED 2, PAPER LATE JAM

PAPER FEED 2, PAPER STOPPED

JAM

FUSER OUTPUT, PAPER LATE JAM

FUSER OUTPUT, PAPER STOPPED

JAM

NON-SPECIFIC PAPER JAM

DUPLEX TURN AROUND, PAPER

STOPPED JAM

DUPLEX PATH, PAPER LATE JAM

Printing monochrome after the color cartridge out was deactivated

ENWW

54.01

54.02

54.03

54.05

54.06

Event log message

13.13.00

13.1C.00

13.20.00

13.21.00

13.30.00

41.XX.00

54.07

54.XX

Description Comments

DUPLEX PATH, PAPER STOPPED JAM

FUSER ACCORDION JAM

PRINTER COULD NOT

AUTOMATICALLY EJECT PAPER

DOOR OPEN JAM

PAPER FEED 1, PAPER LATE JAM

●

X=11 Yellow laser scanner

●

X=12 Magenta laser scanner

●

X=13 Cyan laser scanner

●

X=14. Black laser scanner

●

X=15. Main drive

●

X=16. Main drive

●

X=17. Main drive scanner

The humidity-environment sensor is abnormal.

Printer error

Ensure the product is in a supported environment. If the error persists, replace the CN1 environment sensor.

Developer failure

Density sensor failure.

Printer error Media sensor out of range.

The DMAX density or OHT sensor is out of range.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight

CONFIGURE DEVICE , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight

PRINT QUALITY , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight

QUICK CALIBRATE NOW , and then press the OK button.

Rotary motor error Printer error

Drum phase sensor is out of range.

●

XX = 07 Yellow

●

XX = 08 Magenta

●

XX = 09 Cyan

●

XX = 0A Black

Tools for troubleshooting 379

Event log message

54.0B.XX

54.0C.XX

54.0D.XX

54.0F.XX

54.12

54.14

54.1C

Description Comments

The density sensor is out of range.

●

XX = 00 Black

●

XX = 01 Cyan

●

XX = 02 Magenta

● XX = 03 Yellow

Halftone calibration error.

●

XX = 00: Black Dhalf warning

●

XX = 01: Cyan Dhalf warning

●

XX = 02: Magenta Dhalf warning

●

XX = 03: Yellow Dhalf warning

●

XX = 00: Black densitymeasurement abnormality

●

XX = 01: Cyan densitymeasurement abnormality

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight

CONFIGURE DEVICE , and then press the OK button.

●

XX = 02: Magenta densitymeasurement abnormality

Press the down arrow to highlight

PRINT QUALITY , and then press the OK button.

● XX = 03: Yellow densitymeasurement abnormality

Press the down arrow to highlight

QUICK CALIBRATE NOW , and then press the OK button.

●

XX=00: Black misregistration is out of range.

Press the Home button.

●

XX=01: Cyan misregistration is out of range.

Press the down arrow to highlight

CONFIGURE DEVICE , and then press the OK button.

●

XX=02: Magenta misregistration is out of range.

● XX=03: Yellow misregistration is out of range.

Press the down arrow to highlight

PRINT QUALITY , and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight

FULL CALIBRATE NOW , and then press the OK button.

Printer error

CPR sensor abnormal

Auto clean error

ITB speed control sensor.

Replace RD sensor assembly.

Check RD sensors tor toner residue.

380 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

54.20

54.21

54.35

55.06.01

55.06.02

55.901C

61.00.01

ENWW

67.XX.00

68 8X04

Event log message

54.1E.XX

Description Comments

Halftone calibration error

●

XX = 00 Bad internal data

●

XX = 01 Bad external data

●

XX = 02 Memory allocation

● XX = 03 No default tables

●

XX = 04 Bad parameters

● XX = 05 Cyan data is out of range.

●

XX = 06 Magenta data is out of range.

● XX = 07 Yellow data is out of range.

●

XX = 08 Black data is out of range.

●

XX = 09 Cyan data is noisy.

●

XX = 0A Magenta data is noisy.

● XX = 0B Yellow data is noisy.

●

XX = 0C Black data is noisy.

Media sensor is not calibrated

Scanner beam adjustment warning

●

XX = 01 First scanner

●

XX = 02 Second scanner

Drum speed adjustment abnormality warning

The DC controller NVRM has an abnormal read/write.

The DC controller NVRM is not accessible.

Turn the product off then on.

If the error persists, replace the DC

Controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 161 .

Turn the product off then on.

DCC restored

If the error persists, replace the DC

Controller. See DC controller PCA and tray on page 161 .

DCC NVRAM was restored from the formatter.

Color table error

The permanent storage date does not match the engine.

This event occurs when the color table cannot read a table from the disk and the component reverts to the version in

RAM. The file could be corrupt, missing, or the disk could have failed. No messages display on the control panel.

A system variable (XX) is out of range.

Tools for troubleshooting 381

Event log message

68 8X05

74.00

8x7345

8x7346

8x7347

88.00.XX

99.00.01

99.00.02

99.00.03

99.00.04

99.00.05

99.00.06

99.00.07

99.00.08

99.00.09

99.00.10

99.00.11

99.00.12

99.00.13

99.00.28

382 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Description

The permanent storage date does match the engine.

Disk error: either the number does not match or the write failed

New registration roller

The disk was successfully cleaned and sanitized.

x = slot number

The hard disk or compact flash disk cleaning or sanitizing failed. This is usually caused by a failure of the disk hardware.

x = slot number

Some of the sanitized disk did not verify correctly.

Fail code from the engine self-test execution

No control panel message displays.

The firmware image has a CRC error.

A IO timeout occurred when reading the header number and size.

A disk error occurred.

A IO timeout occurred when reading the remaining header.

A IO timeout occurred when reading image data.

An unexpected read error occurred when reading the header number and size.

An unexpected read error occurred when reading the remainder of the header.

Unexpected read error occurred when reading image data.

Job canceled when reading header number and size

The job was cancelled when reading the remainder of the header.

The header number is one, but the header size does not match the version one size.

The header number is two, but the header size does not match the version two size.

The signature was bad but the customer accepted it anyway.

Comments

ENWW

Clear paper jams

Common causes of jams

The product is jammed.

Cause Solution

The paper does not meet specifications.

A component is installed incorrectly.

Use only paper that meets HP specifications. See the product user guide.

Verify that the transfer belt and transfer roller are correctly installed.

You are using paper that has already passed through a product or copier.

Do not use paper that has been previously printed on or copied.

An input tray is loaded incorrectly.

Remove any excess paper from the input tray. Make sure that the stack is below the maximum stack height mark in the tray.

The paper is skewed.

The paper is binding or sticking together.

The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust them so they hold the stack firmly in place without bending it.

Remove the paper, flex it, rotate it 180°, or flip it over. Reload the paper into the input tray.

The paper is removed before it settles into the output bin.

During two-sided printing, you removed the paper before the second side of the document was printed.

Reset the product. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.

Reset the product and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it.

The paper is in poor condition.

The internal tray rollers are not picking up the paper.

Replace the paper.

If the paper is heavier than 220 g/m 2 (58 lb), it might not be picked from the tray.

The paper has rough or jagged edges.

The paper is perforated or embossed.

Paper was not stored correctly.

The rollers are worn. Replace the rollers.

Replace the paper.

Perforated or embossed paper does not separate easily. Feed single sheets from Tray 1.

Replace the paper in the trays. Paper should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment.

ENWW Clear paper jams 383

The product is jammed.

Cause

Not all product packing material was removed.

The HP postcard media insert is installed in Tray 2, and you are not printing on 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in) paper.

The HP postcard media insert is not installed in Tray 2, and you are printing on 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in) paper.

Solution

Verify that the packing tape, cardboard, and plastic shipping locks have been removed from the product.

Always use the HP postcard media insert when printing on 10 x 15 cm (4 x 6 in) paper, but remove it when printing on other sizes.

Figure 3-57 Common causes of jams (by area)

B C

Fuser

ITB

Tray2

Tray3(Option Feeder1)

Tray4(Option Feeder2)

Item

384 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Tray5(Option Feeder3)

Description

SR4 (PDU) Tray 3 feed sensor

Item

X b

Tray1

Description

SR22 Duplex re-pickup sensor (duplex models only)

ENWW

ENWW b

Item

B, C

Description

SR7 (PDU) Tray 4 feed sensor

SR10 (PDU) Tray 5 feed sensor

SR20 Top-of-Page sensor

(TOP)

SR14/15 Loop sensors 1/2

Item

X-1

X-2

X-3

SR5 Fuser delivery sensor

Table 3-15 Common causes of jams (by area)

Jam code

13.01.00

13.30.00

13.03.00

13.02.00

13.04.00

13.05.00

13.06.00

13.08.00

13.12.00

13.13.00

13.20.00

13.21.00

13.1C.00

Jammed media position

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 3 is stopped before T

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 4 is stopped before X

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 5 is stopped before b

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 1 is stopped before A

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 2 is stopped before A

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 3 is stopped before A

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 4 is stopped before A

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 5 is stopped before A

●

Leading edge of media fed from Tray 4 is stopped before T

● Leading edge of media fed from Tray 5 is stopped before T

●

Media stays at A

●

Media stays at T

●

Leading edge of media is stopped between A and D

● Media stays at D

●

Media fed from Tray 4 stays at X

●

Media fed from Tray 5 stays at b

● Duplex refeed media is stopped between D and E

●

Duplex refeed media is stopped between E and A

●

At power on with door closed, media stays at D

●

At auto-flushing, media stays at T, X, b, A, B/C, D, or E

●

Media jammed at any position

●

Media fuser wrap

Description

SR6 Delivery tray media full sensor

Registration stop position

Duplex media waiting position

1 (duplex models only)

Duplex media waiting position

2 (duplex models only)

Clear paper jams 385

Jam locations

Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it.

NOTE: Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles or green labels.

Figure 3-58 Jam locations

Output bin

Right door

Tray 1 area

Tray 2, and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5

Lower-right door

When a jam occurs, a message appears on the control-panel display that describes the location of the jam. The following table lists the messages that can appear and provides links to the procedures for clearing the jam.

WARNING!

To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before reaching into the inside of the product.

Procedure

See Clear jams in the right door on page 387 .

Type of jam

13.XX.YY JAM IN RIGHT DOOR

13.XX.YY JAMS IN RIGHT DOOR

13.XX.YY FUSER AREA JAM

13.XX.YY FUSER WRAP JAM

13.XX.YY JAM ABOVE TOP OUTPUT BIN

See Clear jams in the output bin area on page 390 .

386 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Type of jam

13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 1

13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 2

13.XX.YY JAM IN OPTIONAL TRAYS

13.XX.YY JAM IN LOWER RIGHT DOOR

Procedure

See

Clear jams in Tray 1 on page 390 .

See

Clear jams in Tray 2 or optional Trays 3, 4, or 5 on page 392 .

See

Clear jams in Tray 2 or optional Trays 3, 4, or 5 on page 392 .

See

Clear jams in the lower right door (Tray 3, 4, or 5) on page 393 .

Clear jams in the right door

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

Open the right door.

Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area.

ENWW Clear paper jams 387

If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser, gently pull downward to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not touch the rollers on the transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print quality.

If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin, remove the fuser and gently pull the paper downward to remove it.

Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible. Remove the fuser to check for jammed paper inside.

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

Grasp the fuser handles, lift up slightly, and pull straight out to remove the fuser.

388 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Open the jam-access door. If paper is jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper fragments.

CAUTION: Even if the body of the fuser has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled.

Close the jam-access door, and push the fuser completely into the product.

Close the right door.

ENWW Clear paper jams 389

Clear jams in the output bin area

If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.

Clear jams in Tray 1

If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out.

Press the OK button to clear the message.

If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray 1 and open the right door.

390 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Gently pull the paper out of the pick up area.

Close the right door.

ENWW Clear paper jams 391

Clear jams in Tray 2 or optional Trays 3, 4, or 5

CAUTION: Opening a tray when paper is jammed can cause the paper to tear and leave pieces of paper in the tray, which might cause another jam. Be sure to clear jams before opening the tray.

Open Tray 2 and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. To access jammed paper from the tray cavity, remove Tray 2 from the product.

Close the tray.

392 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Clear jams in the lower right door (Tray 3, 4, or 5)

Open the lower right door.

If paper is visible, gently pull the jammed paper up or down to remove it.

Close the lower right door.

ENWW Clear paper jams 393

Jam causes and solutions

For locations of jam sensors, see Jam detection on page 55 .

Jams in the output bin

Table 3-16 Causes and solutions for delivery delay jam

Cause Solution

The output-bin full sensor flag is damaged.

Replace the paper delivery assembly. See

Delivery assembly on page 145

See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246 for troubleshooting

information.

Poor contact of the output-bin full sensor connector.

Reconnect the connectors of the output-bin full sensor (SR6) (J47) to DCC PCA

(J123).

The output bin full sensor (SR6) is defective.

Check the output bin full sensor (SR6) using the manual sensor test. See

Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246 . The output bin full sensor

is letter F in the sensor test. Toggle the sensor to determine if the value changes for "F". If the value does not change, replace the sensor.

Poor contact of the fuser-motor (M2) connector.

The fuser motor (M2) is defective.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser motor (J117), (J15), and the DC controller PCA (J105).

Execute the fuser-motor driving test in the actuator-drive mode. If the motor is defective, replace the fuser motor (M2).

Jams in the fuser and transfer area

Table 3-17 Causes and solutions for fuser delivery delay jams

Cause Solution

The fuser-delivery-sensor flag is damaged.

Replace the fuser. See

Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246 . If the sensor is defective,

Poor contact with the fuser-delivery connector.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser-delivery sensor (J48) and the DC controller PCA (J127).

The fuser-delivery sensor (SR5) is defective.

Check the fuser-delivery sensor (SR5) with the manual sensor test. See

replace the sensor.

Table 3-18 Causes and solutions for wrapping jams

Cause Solution

The fuser roller or pressure roller is dirty.

The guide of the fuser delivery unit is dirty.

Create and use a cleaning page. See

Clean the guide.

Cleaning page on page 306

The fuser roller or the pressure roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the fuser. See

See Delivery assembly on page 145 .

The lever for the output bin full sensor on the face-down tray is set incorrectly or is damaged.

Set the lever correctly. If the lever is damaged, replace the delivery assembly.

The spring on the lever for the output bin full sensor on the face-down tray is unhooked.

Reattached the spring.

394 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-18 Causes and solutions for wrapping jams (continued)

Cause Solution

The output bin full sensor on the face-down tray has a poor connection.

The output bin full sensor is defective.

Reconnect connector (J47) on the output bin full sensor and (J128) on the DC controller PCA.

Run the manual sensor test to verify the output bin full sensor is functioning

properly. See F output bin full sensor on page 251

. If not, replace the sensor.

Table 3-19 Causes and solutions for fuser delivery stationary jams

Cause Solution

The fuser roller or pressure roller is worn or deformed.

The fuser-delivery roller is deformed.

Replace the fuser. See Fuser on page 85 .

The gear of the fuser-delivery roller is damaged.

The fuser-delivery sensor flag is stuck or broken.

Poor contact of the fuser-delivery sensor connector.

Check the flag to make sure it moves correctly. See

Manual sensor test

(special-mode test) on page 246 for information. If the flag is damaged, replace

the fuser. See

manual sensor test. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246

Reconnect connector (J48) of the fuser-delivery sensor and connector (J127) on the DC controller PCA.

The fuser delivery sensor (SR5) is defective.

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify that the fuser delivery sensor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the fuser delivery sensor

(SR5).

Clear paper jams 395

Table 3-20 Causes and solutions for residual media jams

Cause Solution

The sensor detecting a residual media jam is not working.

One of the four sensors is reporting a residual jam. Test each sensor using the

for information. If the sensor does not respond, replace the component indicated:

●

TOP sensor (SR20): Replace the registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 128

●

Fuser delivery sensor (SR5): Replace the sensor. See callout 3 in Figure

2-114 Remove the delivery assembly (2 of 7) on page 146 for the sensor

location.

● Loop sensor 1 or 2 (SR14 and SR15): Replace the fuser. See

●

Duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22): Replace the registration assembly. See

Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246 for information. Reconnect

If service was recently performed on the product, a sensor connector might be disconnected.

Run the manual sensor tests to verify which sensor detects the media. See

the corresponding sensor connector:

●

TOP sensor: Connector (J74) and (J145) on the DC controller PCA

●

Fuser delivery sensor: Connector (J48) and connector (J127) on the DC controller PCA

●

Loop sensor 1 or 2: Connector (J162) on the DC controller PCA

●

Duplex re-pickup sensor: Intermediate connector (J74) and connector

(J145) on the DC controller PCA.

Table 3-21 Causes and solutions for pickup delay jams 2

Cause Solution

Poor contact of the pickup motor drive connector.

The pickup motor is defective.

The pickup roller is worn or deformed.

Reconnect the connector (J37) of the pickup motor and connector (J260) of the

DC controller PCA .

Execute the pickup-motor driving test in the actuator-drive mode. If the motor is

defective, replace the pickup motor. See Pickup motor on page 172 .

Replace the pickup roller. See Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86 .

The tray 2 separation roller is worn or deformed.

Poor contact of the TOP sensor connector.

Reconnect the intermediate connector (J74) of the TOP sensor and connector

(J145) on the DC controller PCA.

The TOP sensor (SR20) is defective.

Replace the separation roller. See Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86 .

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the TOP sensor is functioning properly.

See

Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246

for information. If it is not, replace the registration assembly. See

Tray-pickup drive assembly on page 178 .

Poor contact of the pickup solenoid drive connector.

Reconnect the connector (J59) of the pickup solenoid and (J115) on the DC controller PCA.

396 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-21 Causes and solutions for pickup delay jams 2 (continued)

Cause Solution

The pickup solenoid is defective.

The pickup motor is defective.

Run the solenoid drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the pickup solenoid is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the tray-pickup drive assembly. See

Run the pickup motor drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the pickup motor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup motor. See

Pickup motor on page 172 .

Table 3-22 Causes and solutions for pickup stationary jams

Cause Solution

Multiple-feed of media

The TOP sensor lever is set incorrectly or damaged

The spring of the TOP sensor lever is unhooked.

Poor contact of the TOP sensor connector

If the tray 2 pickup roller or separation roller are worn or deformed, replace any defective parts. If the tray 1 pickup roller or separation pad are worn or deformed, replace any defective parts.

Check the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the registration assembly. See

properly. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246 for

Check the spring and place it in correct position.

The TOP sensor is defective.

Reconnect intermediate connector (J74) of the TOP sensor and connector

(J145) on the DC controller PCA.

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the TOP sensor (SR20) is functioning

information. If it is not, replace the registration assembly. See Registration assembly on page 128 .

Jams in the duplex area (HP Color LaserJet CP4525dn, HP Color LaserJet CP4025dn, and HP Color LaserJet CP4525xh only)

Table 3-23 Causes and solutions for duplexing reverse jams

Cause Solution

The duplex reverse roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the delivery assembly. See Delivery assembly on page 145 .

The duplex feed roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the duplex feed unit.

Poor contact of the duplex reverse-motor connector

The duplex reverse motor is defective.

Reconnect the connectors (J39) of the duplex reverse motor, connectors (J202 and J201) on the high-voltage power supply (upper) PCA, and connector

(J113) on the DC controller PCA.

Replace the duplex drive assembly. See

Duplex-drive assembly on page 151 .

Table 3-24 Causes and solutions for duplex repick jams

Cause Solution

The duplex re-pickup sensor lever is set incorrectly or damaged.

The spring of the duplex re-pickup sensor lever is unhooked.

Check the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the right door assembly. See

is functioning properly. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246

Check the spring and place it in correct position.

ENWW Clear paper jams 397

Table 3-24 Causes and solutions for duplex repick jams (continued)

Cause Solution

Poor contact of the duplex re-pickup sensor connector

The duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22) is defective.

Poor contact of the duplex reverse solenoid connector

The duplex reverse solenoid is defective.

Reconnect the intermediate connector (J74) and connector (J145) on the DC controller PCA.

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the duplex re-pickup sensor (SR22)

for information. If it is not, replace the right-door assembly. See

Duplex-drive assembly on page 151

Reconnect the connector (J69) of the duplex reverse solenoid, connectors

J202 and J201 on the high-voltage power supply (upper), and connector J113 on the DC controller PCA.

Replace the duplex-drive assembly. See

Replace the delivery assembly. See

Delivery assembly on page 145 .

The duplex flapper is damaged or malfunctioning.

Poor contact of the duplex reverse solenoid connector

The duplex reverse solenoid is defective.

Reconnect the connector (J69) of the duplex reverse solenoid, connectors

(J202) and (J201) on the high-voltage power supply (upper), and connector

(J113) on the DC controller PCA.

Replace the duplex-drive assembly. See

Duplex-drive assembly on page 151

The duplex flapper is damaged or malfunctioning.

Replace the delivery assembly. See

Delivery assembly on page 145 .

The duplex repick roller is worn or damaged.

Replace the registration assembly. See

assembly. See Registration assembly on page 128 .

Poor contact of the duplex repick clutch connector.

The duplex repick clutch is defective.

Reconnect the intermediate connector (J74) of the duplex repick clutch and connector (J145) on the DC controller PCA.

Run the solenoid drive test in actuator drive mode to verify that the duplex repick clutch is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the registration

Table 3-25 Causes and solutions for residual media jams

Cause Solution

Poor contact of the loop-sensor connector and loop sensor 1 and 2.

Reconnect the connectors of the loop 1 sensor (1 and 2):

● Loop 1 (J11, J352, J350, J50) and the DC controller (J139)

●

Loop 2 (J10, J352, J350, J50) and the DC controller (J139)

The loop sensor is defective.

Run the manual sensor test. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246

for information. If the sensor is defective, replace fuser. See

functioning properly. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246

The spring of the fuser-delivery-sensor lever is unhooked.

Check the spring of the fuser and right door and place it in the correct position.

The fuser-delivery sensor lever is damaged.

Replace the sensor (SR5).

Poor contact of the fuser-delivery sensor connector.

The fuser-delivery sensor is defective.

Reconnect the connectors of the fuser-delivery sensor (J46), intermediate

(J95) and the DC controller PCA (J123).

Run the manual sensor test to make sure the fuser-delivery sensor is

for information. If the sensor is defective, replace the fuser. See

Replace the right door assembly. See Right-door assembly on page 113

398 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Table 3-25 Causes and solutions for residual media jams (continued)

Cause Solution

The spring of the duplex repickup sensor lever is unhooked.

Check the spring and place it in the correct position. The sensor is located in the right door behind the cover close to the engine side.

The duplex pickup sensor lever is damaged.

Poor contact of the duplexing media-reversesensor connector

Reconnect the connectors of the duplexing media-reverse sensor (J8) and

(J90) and the duplexing driver PCA (J107).

The duplex repickup sensor (SR22) is defective.

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the duplex repickup sensor is

functioning properly. See Manual sensor test (special-mode test) on page 246 for information. If the sensor is defective, replace the duplex

repickup sensor.

NOTE: Even if jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam from the inside of the product by opening the right door.

Jams in Tray 1, Tray 2 and internal paper path

Table 3-26 Causes and solutions for pickup delay jam 1: tray pickup

Cause Solution

The tray 1 pick up roller or the tray 1 separation pad is worn or deformed.

Replace the tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad. See

Pickup roller

(Tray 1) on page 87 . Replace the right door. See

Poor contact of the tray 1 media-presencesensor connector

Poor contact of the TOP sensor connector.

Reconnect the connectors of the tray media-feed sensor (J7), intermediate

(J85), and DC controller (J107).

Reconnect the intermediate connector (J74) of the TOP sensor and connector

(J145) on the DC controller PCA.

The TOP sensor is defective.

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the TOP sensor is functioning properly. If not, replace the registration assembly. See

Poor contact of the MP-pickup-solenoid drive connector

Reconnect the connector of the tray pickup solenoid (J52) and the DC controller

PCA (J148).

The MP-pickup solenoid is defective.

Poor contact of the pickup-motor drive connector (M13)

Execute the tray-pickup-solenoid driving test in the actuator-drive mode. If the solenoid is defective, replace the right door assembly. See

Pickup motor on page 172 .

Reconnect the connector (J37) and connector (J260) on the DC controller PCA.

The pickup motor is defective.

Execute the pickup-motor driving test in the actuator-drive mode. If the motor is defective, replace the pickup motor. See

ENWW Clear paper jams 399

Table 3-27 Causes and solutions for pickup stationary jams

Cause Solution

Multiple feed of media Replace any worn or deformed parts (tray separation pad, tray feed roller, MP tray pickup roller or MP tray separation pad). If replacing the MP tray separation pad, you must replace the right door assembly. See

Right-door assembly on page 113

Check the separation pad and MP tray separation pad to see if they are firmly seated and coupled with the torque limiter.

Replace the separation pad and feed roller for Tray 2 and Tray 3.

If the MP tray pickup roller if defective, replace the roller. See

Pickup roller

(Tray 1) on page 87 . If the MP tray separation pad is defective, replace the right

door assembly. See

Place the secondary-transfer-roller unit in the correct position.

The secondary transfer roller is not set correctly.

The secondary-transfer roller is worn or deformed.

Poor contact of the drum 3 drive connector

The drum motor 3 is defective.

The ITB does not rotate smoothly.

Replace the secondary-transfer-roller assembly. See

Replace the ITB. See Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) on page 92 .

Reconnect the connectors of the ITB motor (J42) and the DC controller PCA

(J121).

Execute the drum 3 driving test in the actuator-drive mode. If the motor is defective, replace the ITB motor.

Jams in Tray 3, 4, and 5

Table 3-28 Causes and solutions for pickup delay and pickup stationary jams

Cause Solution

The paper-feeder pickup roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the pickup roller. See

Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86 .

The paper-feeder separation roller is worn or deformed.

Replace the separation roller. See

Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86 .

The paper-feeder feed roller is worn or deformed.

Poor contact of the paper-feeder media-feed sensor connector (1, 2, or 3)

Replace the feed roller. See

Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86 .

●

Tray 3: Reconnect connectors (J408) and (J13)

● Tray 4: Reconnect connectors (J406) and (J22)

●

Tray 5: Reconnect connectors (J403) and (J32)

A tray feed sensor is defective.

Poor contact of a paper-feeder pickup solenoid drive connector (1, 2, or 3)

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the paper-feeder media feed sensor

is functioning properly. See Manual sensor test 2 (special-mode test) on page 259

for information. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly of the specific tray. See

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

● Tray 3: Reconnect connectors (J408) and (J18)

●

Tray 4: Reconnect connectors (J406) and (J20)

●

Tray 5: Reconnect connectors (J403) and (J30)

400 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-28 Causes and solutions for pickup delay and pickup stationary jams (continued)

Cause Solution

The paper-feeder pickup solenoid is defective.

Run the solenoid drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the paperfeeder pickup solenoid is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly of the specific tray. See

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

Poor contact of paper-feeder pickup motor drive connector.

The paper-feeder pickup motor is defective.

Reconnect the connector (J409) on the paper feeder driver PCA and connector

(J14).

Run the pickup motor drive test in the actuator drive mode to verify that the paper-feeder pickup motor is functioning properly. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly of the specific tray. See

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

Multiple feed of media If the tray 3 pickup roller, separation roller, or feed roller is worn or deformed, replace any defective parts. See

Feed and separation rollers (Trays 2-5) on page 86 .

The paper-feeder media-feed sensor lever is set incorrectly or damaged.

Check the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the paper-feeder assembly.

Check the spring and place it in correct position.

The spring of the paper-feeder media-feed sensor lever is unhooked.

Poor contact of the paper-feeder media-feed sensor connector.

A tray feed sensor is defective.

Reconnect the connector (J406) on the connector PCA and connector (J22) of the paper-feeder media feed sensor.

Run the manual sensor test to verify that the tray feed sensor is functioning

properly. See Manual sensor test 2 (special-mode test) on page 259 for

information. If it is not, replace the pickup assembly of the specific tray. See

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

Table 3-29 Causes and solutions for residual media jams

Cause Solution

The sensor that detects residual paper jams is set incorrectly or damaged.

Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See

Manual sensor test 2 (special-mode test) on page 259 for information. Check

the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly. If it is damaged, replace the corresponding pickup assembly. See

Pickup assembly (optional paper feeder) on page 226 .

The spring of the sensor lever that detects residual paper jams is unhooked.

Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See

Manual sensor test 2 (special-mode test) on page 259 for information. Check

the spring of the sensor lever to make sure it is set correctly.

Poor contact exists in the sensor that detects residual paper jams.

Run the manual sensor test to verify which sensor detects the paper. See

Manual sensor test 2 (special-mode test) on page 259 for information.

Reconnect the following corresponding sensor connectors:

●

Tray 3: Reconnect connectors (J408) and (J13)

●

Tray 4: Reconnect connectors (J406) and (J22)

●

Tray 5: Reconnect connectors (J403) and (J32)

The sensor that detects residual paper jams is defective.

Run the sensor test in the sensor monitor mode to verify which sensor detects the paper. Replace media feed sensor 1, 2 or 3.

Clear paper jams 401

Change jam recovery

This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages. The following options are available:

●

AUTO — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when enough memory is available. This is the default setting.

●

OFF — The product does not try to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.

NOTE: When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost.

●

ON — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.

Set the jam recovery feature

Press the Home button .

Press the down arrow to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the SYSTEM SETUP menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the JAM RECOVERY menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow or up arrow / to highlight the appropriate setting, and then press the

OK button.

Press the Home button to return to the Ready state.

402 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Solve paper-handling problems

Product feeds multiple sheets

Product feeds multiple sheets

Cause

The input tray is overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark.

Print paper is sticking together.

Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.

Trays are not properly adjusted.

Tray 2 feeds multiple sheets.

Solution

Remove excess paper from the input tray.

Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or flip it over, and then reload it into the tray.

NOTE: Do not fan paper. Fanning can cause static electricity, which can cause paper to stick together.

Use only paper that meets HP paper specifications for this product.

Make sure that the paper guides match the size of paper being used.

Make sure Tray 2 is not overfilled. Open the tray and verify that the paper stack is below the maximum stack height mark.

Remove paper from Tray 2 to avoid jams.

Product feeds incorrect page size

Product feeds incorrect page size

Cause Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded in the tray.

Load the correct size paper in the tray.

The correct size paper is not selected in the software program or printer driver.

Confirm that the settings in the software program and printer driver are correct, because the software program settings override the printer driver and control panel settings, and the printer driver settings override the control panel settings.

The correct size paper for the tray is not selected in the product control panel.

From the control panel, select the correct size paper for the tray.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the paper guides are touching the paper.

Product pulls from incorrect tray

Product pulls from incorrect tray

Cause

You are using a driver for a different product.

The specified tray is empty.

Solution

Use a driver for this product.

Load paper in the specified tray.

ENWW Solve paper-handling problems 403

Product pulls from incorrect tray

Cause

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Solution

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Paper does not feed automatically

Paper does not feed automatically

Cause Solution

Manual feed is selected in the software program.

Load Tray 1 with paper, or, if the paper is loaded, press the checkmark button .

Load the correct size paper.

The correct size paper is not loaded.

The input tray is empty.

Load paper into the input tray.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed.

Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the rear and width paper guides are touching the paper.

The manual-feed prompt is set to ALWAYS . The product always prompts for manual feed, even if the tray is loaded.

Open the tray, reload the media, and then close the tray.

Or, change the manual-feed prompt setting to UNLESS

LOADED , so that the product prompts for manual feed only when the tray is empty.

The USE REQUESTED TRAY setting on the product is set to

EXCLUSIVELY , and the requested tray is empty. The product will not use another tray.

Load the requested tray.

Or, change the setting from EXCLUSIVELY to FIRST on the

CONFIGURE DEVICE menu. The product can use other trays if no media is loaded in the specified tray.

Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5

Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5

Cause Solution

The correct size paper is not loaded.

The input tray is empty.

Load the correct size paper.

Load paper in the input tray.

The correct paper type for the input tray is not selected in the product control panel.

From the product control panel, select the correct paper type for the input tray. Trays configured for a paper type with a specific weight range will not match a print job that specifies an exact weight, even if the specified weight is within the weight range.

Paper from a previous jam has not been completely removed.

Open the product and remove any paper in the paper path.

Closely inspect the fuser area for jams.

404 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Paper does not feed from Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5

Cause

None of the optional trays appear as input tray options.

An optional tray is incorrectly installed.

The paper size is not configured correctly for the input tray.

The guides in the tray are not against the paper.

Solution

The optional trays only display as available if they are installed.

Verify that any optional trays are correctly installed. Verify that the printer driver has been configured to recognize the optional trays.

Print a configuration page to confirm that the optional tray is installed. If not, verify that the tray is correctly attached to the product.

Print a configuration page or use the control panel to determine the paper size for which the tray is configured.

Verify that the guides are touching the paper.

Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed

Transparencies or glossy paper will not feed

Cause Solution

The correct paper type is not specified in the software or printer driver.

Verify that the correct paper type is selected in the software or printer driver.

The input tray is overfilled.

Remove excess paper from the input tray. Do not exceed the maximum stack height marks for the tray.

Paper in another input tray is the same size as the transparencies, and the product is defaulting to the other tray.

Make sure that the input tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is selected in the software program or printer driver. Use the product control panel to configure the tray to the paper type loaded.

The tray containing the transparencies or glossy paper is not configured correctly for type.

Transparencies or glossy paper might not meet supported paper specifications.

High-humidity environments may cause glossy paper not to feed, or to feed too many sheets.

Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product.

Avoid printing glossy paper in high humidity conditions. When printing glossy paper, removing the paper from the wrapper and letting it rest for a few hours can improve feeding into the product. However, letting paper rest in humid environments may also cause blisters.

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product

Cause Solution

Envelopes are loaded in an unsupported tray. Only Tray 1 can feed envelopes.

Load envelopes into Tray 1.

Envelopes are curled or damaged.

Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled environment.

ENWW Solve paper-handling problems 405

Envelopes jam or will not feed in the product

Cause

Envelopes are sealing because the moisture content is too high.

Envelope orientation is incorrect.

This product does not support the envelopes being used.

Tray 1 is configured for a size other than envelopes.

Solution

Try using different envelopes. Store envelopes in a controlled environment.

Verify that the envelope is loaded correctly.

Refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide .

Configure Tray 1 size for envelopes.

Output is curled or wrinkled

Output is curled or wrinkled

Cause Solution

Paper does not meet the specifications for this product.

Paper is damaged or in poor condition.

Product is operating in an excessively humid environment.

You are printing large, solid-filled areas.

Use only paper that meets the HP paper specifications for this product.

Remove paper from the input tray and load paper that is in good condition.

Verify that the printing environment is within humidity specifications.

Large, solid-filled areas can cause excessive curl. Try using a different pattern.

Paper used was not stored correctly and might have absorbed moisture.

Remove paper and replace it with paper from a fresh, unopened package.

Paper has poorly cut edges.

Remove paper, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees or turn it over, and then reload it into the input tray. Do not fan paper. If the problem persists, replace the paper.

The specific paper type was not configured for the tray or selected in the software.

The paper has previously been used for a print job.

Configure the software for the paper (see the software documentation). Configure the tray for the paper.

Do not re-use paper.

Product will not duplex or duplexes incorrectly

Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly

Cause Solution

You are trying to duplex on unsupported paper.

The printer driver is not set up for duplex printing.

The first page is printing on the back of preprinted forms or letterhead.

Verify that the paper is supported for duplex printing.

Set up the printer driver to enable duplex printing.

Load preprinted forms and letterhead in Tray 1 with the letterhead or printed side down, with the top of the page leading into the product. For Tray 2 and 3, load the paper printed side up with the top of the page toward the right of the product.

406 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Product will not duplex (print 2-sided jobs) or duplexes incorrectly

Cause Solution

The product model does not support automatic 2-sided printing.

The product configuration is not set for duplexing.

The HP Color LaserJet CP4525 and HP Color LaserJet

CP4525n models do not support automatic 2-sided printing.

In Windows, run the automatic configuration feature:

Click the Start button, point to Settings , and then click

Printers (for Windows 2000) or Printers and Faxes (for

Windows XP).

Right-click the HP product icon, and then click

Properties or Printing Preferences .

Click the Device Settings tab.

Under Installable Options , click Update Now in the

Automatic Configuration list.

ENWW Solve paper-handling problems 407

Use manual print modes

Try the following multi-purpose (MP) modes to see if they solve the image-quality problems. These options can be found in the ADJUST PAPER TYPES and OPTIMIZE submenus under the PRINT

QUALITY menu on the control panel.

Table 3-30 MP modes under the ADJUST PAPER TYPES sub menu

PRINT MODE

●

AUTOSENSE MODE

●

NORMAL MODE

● LIGHT MODE

●

LIGHT ROUGH MODE

● HEAVY MODE

●

EXTRA HEAVY MODE

● CARDSTOCK MODE

●

HEAVYGLOSSY MODE

● X-HVYGLOSSY MODE

●

CARD GLOSSY MODE

● ROUGH MODE

●

TRANSPARENCY MODE

●

4MM TRNS MODE

●

TRANSPARENCY2 MODE

● TOUGH MODE

●

LABEL MODE

● ENVELOPE MODE

RESISTANCE MODE

HUMIDITY MODE

NOTE: Not all print modes are available for all paper types.

Set to UP to resolve print-quality issues caused by poor secondary transfer in low-humidity environments with resistive or rough surface media.

With glossy film, set to HIGH when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on HP

Tough Paper or Opaque film.

PRE-ROTATION MODE

With transparencies, set to HIGH when the product is in a highhumidity environment and print-quality defects occur on color transparencies on the first page of a print job.

With all other paper types, set to HIGH when the product is in a high-humidity environment and light density occurs on the first page of a print job.

Set this feature to ON if horizontal banding occurs on pages.

408 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

ENWW

Table 3-30 MP modes under the ADJUST PAPER TYPES sub menu (continued)

FUSER TEMP MODE If you are seeing a faint image of the page repeated at the bottom of the page or on the following page, first make sure the Paper Type and Print Mode settings are correct for the type of paper you are using. If you continue to see ghost images on your print jobs, set the Fuser Temp feature to one of the

Alternate settings . Try the ALTERNATE 1 setting first and see if it solves the problem. If you continue to see the problem, try

ALTERNATE 2 and then ALTERNATE 3 . Using the

ALTERNATE 2 and ALTERNATE 3 settings might cause an extra delay between jobs.

PAPER CURL MODE Use in high-humidity and high-temperature environments. The

REDUCED setting decreases fuser temperature and increases the interpage gap.

Table 3-31 MP modes under the OPTIMIZE submenu

NORMAL PAPER Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth paper of normal weight.

HEAVY PAPER

ENVELOPE MODE

ENVIRONMENT

LINE VOLTAGE

TRAY1

BACKGROUND

UNIFORMITY CONTROL

TRACKING CONTROL

REGISTRATION

TRANSFER CONTROL

PROCESS CLEANING PAGE

Set to SMOOTH when printing on smooth, heavy media types.

Set to REDUCED TEMP if envelopes are sticking due to moisture in the envelop adhesive.

Set to LOW TEMP if the product is operating in a lowtemperature environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image.

Set to LOW VOLTAGE if the product is operating in a lowvoltage environment and you are having problems with print quality such as blisters in the printed image.

Set the mode to ALTERNATE if you are seeing marks on the back side of the paper when printing from Tray 1. This sets the product to initiate a clean sequence every time a job finishes when the product is set for ANY SIZE and ANY TYPE for Tray

Set to ALTERNATIVE 1 when a background occurs all over the page. Set to ALTERNATIVE 2 when thin vertical lines appear on the page. Set to ALTERNATIVE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem.

Set to ALTERNATIVE 1 to improve uniformity on any paper type. Set to ALTERNATIVE 2 to improve uniformity on normal and light paper types. Set to ALTERNATIVE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem.

Improves color stability by adjusting the bias voltage. Make sure this mode is set to ON .

Set to ALTERNATIVE when color misregistration occurs.

Set to ALTERNATIVE 1 to reduce primary transfer bias and to resolve low density or blotchy images. Set to ALTERNATIVE

2 to resolve ghosting outlines that look like a finger or fingers.

Set to ALTERNATIVE 3 when the other alternatives do not correct the problem.

Generates and processes a fuser cleaning page for the dn printer and HP Color LaserJet CP4525xh printer only.

Use manual print modes 409

Solve image-quality problems

This section helps you define print-quality problems and what to do to correct them. Often print-quality problems can be handled easily by making sure that the product is maintained, using paper that meets

HP specifications, or running a cleaning page.

Image defects table

The following examples depict letter-size paper that has passed through the product short-edge first.

These examples illustrate problems that would affect all the pages that you print, whether you print in color or in black only. The topics that follow list the typical cause and solution for each of these examples.

Problem

Print is light or faded on entire page.

Sample

Print is light or faded in a particular color.

Image is too dark.

Cause Solution

Poor contacts exist on the ITB unit and the product grounding unit.

Clean the grounding contacts. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage.

Replace any deformed or damaged parts.

Poor secondary transfer contacts exist on the secondary transfer roller and the ITB.

Poor primary transfer bias contacts on the ITB unit and product.

Poor primary charging bias contacts with the print cartridge and product.

Poor developing bias contacts with the print cartridge and product.

The RD sensor is defective.

Clean the contacts. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts.

Clean the contacts of the color that produces the light print. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage.

Replace any deformed or damaged parts.

Replace the RD sensor. See

Registration density (RD) sensor assembly on page 124 .

Page is blank.

The high-voltage powersupply lower is defective (no developing bias output).

Replace the high-voltage powersupply lower. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

410 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Problem

The page is all black or a solid color.

Sample Cause

Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product.

Solution

Clean each contact of the color that produces the all black or solid color.

If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage. Replace any deformed or damaged parts. Replace the affected print cartridge.

White spots appear in an image

The back of the page is dirty.

Vertical streaks or bands appear on the page.

The primary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated.

Replace the ITB. See

Secondary transfer roller on page 90

The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated.

Replace the secondary-transferroller. See

The secondary transfer roller is dirty.

The fuser inlet guide or separation guide is dirty.

The pressure roller is dirty.

Replace the secondary transfer roller. See

Secondary transfer roller on page 90

Clean the dirty parts. If the dirt does not come off, replace the guide.

Run the cleaning page several times. If the dirt does not come off, send a fuser cleaning kit. If the issue persists, replace the fuser. See

Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect.

Scratches are present on the circumference of the photosensitive drum.

Scratches are present on the circumference of the fuser roller.

Replace the fuser. See

Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB.

Replace the ITB. See

The ITB drive roller is deformed or has deteriorated.

The ITB cleaning mechanism is malfunctioning.

ENWW Solve image-quality problems 411

Problem

Vertical white lines appear in a particular color.

Sample

Vertical white lines appear in all colors.

Horizontal lines appear on the page.

A horizontal white line appears on the page.

Cause Solution

The laser beam window is dirty.

Clean the window and remove any foreign substances.

Scratches are present on the circumference of the developing cylinder or photosensitive drum.

Remove the affected print cartridge and re-install. The PGCs will clean the glass.

White scratch down the page could mean the scanner glass needs to be cleaned.

If the problem persists, replace the affected print cartridge.

The laser/scanner-unit mirror is dirty.

Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See

Horizontal scratches on the fuser roller.

Replace the fuser. See

Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB.

Remove the affected print cartridge and re-install. The PGCs will clean the glass.

White scratch down the page could mean the scanner glass needs to be cleaned.

Replace the ITB. See

Repetitive horizontal lines appear.

Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller. Clean the roller. If the roller cannot be cleaned, replace the fuser. See

Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum.

Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect.

Horizontal scratches are present on the fuser roller.

Repetitive horizontal white lines appear.

Replace the fuser. See

on page 85 .

Fuser

Use the repetitive defects ruler to identify the dirty roller. Clean the roller. If the roller cannot be cleaned, replace the roller.

Horizontal scratches are present on the photosensitive drum.

Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect.

Scratches are present on the circumference of the ITB.

Replace the ITB. See

High-voltage power supply lower (HVPS-D) on page 163 .

412 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Problem

Image in a particular color does not print in the correct color.

Sample

Dropouts appear.

The toner is not fully fused to the paper.

Cause Solution

Poor contact exists in the primary charging bias or developing bias contacts between the print cartridge and the product.

Clean each contact of the color that produces the missing color. If the problem remains after cleaning, check the contacts for damage.

Replace any deformed or damaged parts.

The print cartridge (primary charging roller, developing roller, or photosensitive drum) is defective.

Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect.

The high-voltage powersupply lower is defective (no primary charging bias or developing bias output).

The laser/scanner unit is defective.

The secondary transfer roller is deformed or has deteriorated.

Replace the high-voltage powersupply lower. See

Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See

Secondary transfer roller

Replace the secondary-transferroller. See

on page 90

The primary charging roller, developing roller, or photosensitive drum is deformed or has deteriorated.

Replace the print cartridge of the color that matches the defect.

The fuser roller is deformed or has deteriorated.

Replace the fuser.

The high-voltage powersupply T PCA is defective (no transfer bias output).

Replace the high-voltage powersupply upper. See

High-voltage power supply upper (HVPS-T) on page 196 .

The fuser roller or pressure roller is scarred or deformed.

Replace the fuser. See

The thermistor is defective.

The fuser heater is defective.

Replace the fuser. See

ENWW Solve image-quality problems 413

Problem

Some color is misregistered.

Sample

Toner smears appear on the media.

The printed page contains misformed characters.

Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page.

Cause Solution

The product is incorrectly calibrated.

The ITB unit is defective.

Calibrate the product.

The drive gear of the ITB motor is worn or chipped.

The RD sensor is defective.

The laser/scanner unit is defective.

If the ITB does not rotate smoothly or a cleaning malfunction occurs (ITB is dirty), replace the ITB. See

Registration density (RD) sensor assembly on page 124 .

Check each drive gear between the

ITB drive roller and the ITB motor. If the gear is worn or chipped, replace the drive unit.

Open and close the front door several times to clean the RD sensor. If the problem persists, replace the RD sensor. See

Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See

The print cartridge is defective.

Replace the print cartridge of the affected color.

The product has residual media.

Remove the residual media.

The fuser inlet guide is dirty.

Clean the fuser inlet guide.

The product is experiencing page skew.

The laser/scanner unit is defective.

See the “Text or graphics are skewed on the printed page” row in this table.

Replace the laser/scanner assembly. See

Secondary transfer assembly on page 119 .

The registration shutter spring is unhooked.

Check the spring and place it in the correct position.

The registration shutter spring is deformed.

Replace the secondary transfer assembly. See

414 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Problem

The printed page contains wrinkles or creases.

Sample

The front of the page is dirty.

Repetitive horizontal lines

Pages have flecks of toner

Pages have one or more skewed color planes (can appear on the right or left side of the page)

Cause Solution

The roller or media feed guide is dirty.

Clean any dirty components.

A feed roller is deformed or has deteriorated.

Replace any deformed or deteriorated rollers.

Replace the paper-feed-guide unit.

The paper feed guide is damaged.

The photosensitive drum is dirty.

Replace the print cartridge.

The fuser roller or pressure roller is dirty.

Execute a Pressure roller clean mode . If the dirt does not come off, replace the fuser. See

Clear the jam. See Clear paper jams on page 383

NOTE: Cleaning the fuser with HP tough paper provides better results than with plain paper. You might need to execute the cleaning process several times to remove all contaminates on the fuser.

See repetitive image defect ruler.

Clean the indicated roller. If the contaminate does not come off, replace appropriate roller or assembly.

Execute a cleaning page to clean the contaminate off the fuser. The cleaning page may need to be run several time to clean the fuser. Do not replace the fuser.

NOTE: Cleaning the fuser with HP tough paper provides better results than with plain paper. You might need to execute the cleaning process several times to remove all contaminates on the fuser.

Remove, and then reinstall the print cartridge associated with the defect.

ENWW Solve image-quality problems 415

Clean the product

Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the product. This can cause print-quality problems during printing. Cleaning the product eliminates or reduces these problems.

Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you change the print cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep the product free from dust and debris.

Clean the product

Turn the product off and then unplug the power cord and all interface cables.

Use a soft, water-moistened cloth to remove marks or spots from the surface of the product. Wipe the surface with a soft, dry cloth.

CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt or the spongy surfaces of rollers. Skin oils and fingerprints can cause print quality problems.

Clean the paper path

Press the Home button .

Press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the PRINT QUALITY menu, and then press the

OK button.

If the product has automatic two-sided printing, go to step 5.

If the product does not have automatic two-sided printing, press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the CREATE CLEANING PAGE option, and then press the OK button. Follow the instructions on the printed page.

Press the up arrow or down arrow / to highlight the PROCESS CLEANING PAGE option, and then press the OK button. The cleaning process takes several minutes.

Discard the printed page. The task is complete.

416 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Solve performance problems

Problem

Pages print but are totally blank.

Pages print very slowly.

Pages did not print.

Cause Solution

The document might contain blank pages.

Check the document that you are printing to see if content appears on all of the pages.

The product might be malfunctioning.

To check the product, print a

Configuration page.

Print on a different type of paper.

Heavier paper types can slow the print job.

Complex pages can print slowly.

Proper fusing may require a slower print speed to ensure the best print quality.

Large batches, narrow paper, and special paper such as gloss, transparency, cardstock, and HP Tough

Paper can slow the print job.

Print in smaller batches, on a different type of paper, or on a different size of paper.

The product might not be pulling paper correctly.

The paper is jamming in the product.

The USB cable might be defective or incorrectly connected.

Other devices are running on your computer.

Make sure paper is loaded in the tray correctly.

●

Disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect it.

● Try printing a job that has printed in the past.

●

Try using a different USB cable.

The product might not share a USB port.

If you have an external hard drive or network switchbox that is connected to the same port as the product, the other device might be interfering. To connect and use the product, you must disconnect the other device or you must use two USB ports on the computer.

ENWW Solve performance problems 417

Solve connectivity problems

Solve direct-connect problems

If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.

● Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.

● Verify that the cable is not longer than 2 meters (6 feet). Replace the cable if necessary.

● Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary.

Solve network problems

Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page. See

Configuration page on page 307 .

Are there any physical connection problems between the workstation or file server and the product?

Verify that the network cabling, connections, and router configurations are correct. Verify that the network cable lengths meet network specifications.

Are your network cables connected properly?

Make sure that the product is attached to the network using the appropriate port and cable. Check each cable connection to make sure it is secure and in the right place. If the problem continues, try a different cable or ports on the hub or transceiver. The amber activity light and the green link status light next to the port connection on the back of the product should be lit.

Are the link speed and duplex settings set correctly?

Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). See I/O menu on page 334

Can you "ping" the product?

Use the command prompt to ping the product from your computer. For example: ping 192.168.45.39

Ensure that the ping displays round-trip times.

If you are able to ping the product, verify that the IP address configuration for the product is correct on the computer. If it is correct, delete and then add the product again.

If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.

Have any software applications been added to the network?

Make sure they are compatible and that they are installed correctly with the correct printer drivers.

Are other users able to print?

The problem may be workstation-specific. Check the workstation network drivers, printer drivers, and redirection (capture in Novell NetWare).

If other users are able to print, are they using the same network operating system?

418 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

Check your system for proper network operating system setup.

Is your protocol enabled?

Check the status of your protocol on the Configuration page. You can also use the embedded Web server to check the status of other protocols. See the product user guide.

Does the product appear in HP Web Jetadmin or other management application?

● Verify network settings on the Network configuration page.

●

Confirm the network settings for the product using the product control panel (for products with control panels).

ENWW Solve connectivity problems 419

Service mode functions

Service menu

The SERVICE menu is PIN-protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the SERVICE menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, the product prompts you to enter an eight-digit PIN number. The PINs for the HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CP4020-CP4520 Series are 11402509 and 11452509.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight SERVICE , and then press the OK button.

Enter the eight-digit PIN using the alphanumeric keypad.

Press the OK button to enter the PIN and open the SERVICE menu.

The following menu items appear in the SERVICE menu:

CLEAR EVENT LOG

CLEAR BOOTLOADER PASSWORD

TOTAL PAGE COUNT

MONO CYCLE COUNT

COLOR CYCLE COUNT

This menu item allows you to clear the event log.

This menu item allows you to clear the bootloader password if it has been lost.

The page count stored in NVRAM and displayed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (engine test prints are not included in this number). If it becomes necessary to repair a product by installing a DC controller PCA, you must set the page count so that it represents the age of the print engine rather than the age of the DC controller PCA. When you press either the up arrow

or down arrow to change the value of the first digit, the prompts are changed to indicate an acceptable range and the appropriate value.

After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the mono page count so that the figure continues to represent the page count for the product engine. The page count that is stored in

NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter when repairing a product, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way, the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter. The page count is in two categories: total mono pages and total color pages.

After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the color page count so that the figure continues to represent the page count for the product engine. The page count that is stored in

420 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

REFURBISH PAGE COUNT

REFURBISH CYCLE COUNT

SERIAL NUMBER :

The number of pages a product is set to print when it is refurbished. The count is kept for legal purposes. If it becomes necessary to refurbish a product, you must be able to set the page count so that it represents the age of the print engine when it was refurbished. This menu item allows SERVICE ID to be reset after being refurbished, if total page count minus refurbish page count is less than 500. Without this menu item,

SERVICE ID could not be reset, if the calculated page count was less than 500. When you press either the When you press either the up arrow or down arrow to change the value of the first digit, the prompts are changed to indicate an acceptable range and the appropriate value.

Use this item to record the page count when the product was refurbished.

After replacing the formatter, use this item to reset the product serial number.

ENWW Service mode functions 421

SERVICE ID

COLD RESET PAPER

NEW REGISTRATION ROLLER

MEDIA SENSOR VALUE

422 Chapter 3 Solve problems

Use this item to show the date that the product was first used on the control panel. This eliminates the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty.

Restore the service ID

If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the product was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates. The date 17-October-2002 is used as an example.

To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year.

For instance, if the product was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12.

Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9.

◦

Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270 or add 17 to 270: 270

+ 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287.

Convert the service ID to an actual date

You can use the product Service ID number to determine whether the product is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows:

Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the product was installed.

Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month.

The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date.

Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows:

12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002.

287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents

October.

The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date.

The complete date is 17-October-2002.

NOTE: A six-day grace period is built into the date system.

When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in

NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values.

Use after installing a new registration roller.

Use this menu item to calibrate the media sensor by selecting a threshold value from a specified range. This calibration is most likely to occur when a media sensor has been replaced, but might also occur if the current sensor needs to be optimized. The recommended media sensor threshold value for each sensor is included in the replacement kit for the part.

ENWW

Product resets

Restore factory-set defaults

The RESETS menu allows you to reset factory settings, and disable or enable sleep mode.

To display: Press the Home button , select the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then select the

RESETS menu.

Select RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS from the submenu, and then press the OK button.

Hard disk initialization (optional)

A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the product's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code displays on the control panel indicating a disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it.

Turn the product on.

As the product performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the Home button until all three lights on the control panel are lit.

Press the back arrow . The message INITIALIZE DISC displays on the control panel.

Press the down arrow . The product initializes the hard disk and continues its power-on sequence.

NVRAM initialization

CAUTION: Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings, and the EIO card. Use the SERVICE menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this product to recognize the product. Initialize

NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset product variables but still retain the needed values in the SERVICE menu.

NOTE: Print a configuration page before initializing NVRAM.

From the configuration page and supplies status page, gather the following information:

● Total page count and color page count

●

Serial number

Turn the product on and watch the control panel display.

When the display shows the memory count, press and hold the down arrow until all three lights on the control panel are lit.

Press the up arrow .

Press the Home button. The message SKIP DISK LOAD displays on the control panel.

Press the up arrow until NVRAM INIT is highlighted, and then press the OK button . The product initializes NVRAM and then continues its power-on sequence.

ENWW Service mode functions 423

Product cold reset

Before beginning, print a configuration page and supplies status page. Use these pages to verify resets have occurred.

Press the Home button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the RESET menu, and then press the OK button.

Press the down arrow to highlight the RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS menu, and then press the OK button.

Product updates

To download the most recent firmware upgrade for the product, go to www.hp.com/go/ cljcp4025_firmware or www.hp.com/go/cljcp4525_firmware .

424 Chapter 3 Solve problems ENWW

4 Parts and diagrams

●

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

●

Part numbers

●

Screws

●

How to use the parts lists and diagrams

●

External covers, panels, and doors

●

●

●

●

●

Alphabetical parts list

●

Numerical parts list

ENWW 425

Order parts, accessories, and supplies

You can obtain the following items directly from HP:

● Replacement parts: To order replacement parts in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/hpparts/ .

Outside the United States, order parts by contacting your local authorized HP service center.

●

Supplies and accessories: To order supplies in the U.S., go to www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies . To order supplies worldwide, go to www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html

. To order accessories, go to www.hp.com/support/cljcp4025 or www.hp.com/support/cljcp4525 .

426 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Part numbers

The following list of accessories was current at the time of printing. Ordering information and availability of the accessories might change during the life of the product.

Accessories

Product name Product number

HP Color LaserJet 1 x 500 Paper Feeder and stand

CC422A

HP Color LaserJet 3 x 500 Paper Feeder and stand

CC423A

HP Postcard media insert tray CC497A

Part number

CC493-67902

CC493-67903

CC497-67902

Print cartridges and toner collection unit

Product name

Product number

HP Color LaserJet standard black print cartridge (11K)

CE260A

HP Color LaserJet high capacity black print cartridge (16K)

HP Color LaserJet cyan print cartridge

CE260X

CE261A

HP Color LaserJet yellow print cartridge CE262A

HP Color LaserJet magenta print cartridge

CE263A

1 For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies

Memory

Product name

200-pin DDR2 SODIMM x64 memory module (256MB)

200-pin DDR2 SODIMM x64 memory module (512MB)

Product number

CE466A

CE467A

Cables and interfaces

Product name

Enhanced I/O (EIO) card

USB cable 2 meter standard

Product number

J7961G

Q6264A

Part number

CE260-67901

CE264-67901

CE261-67901

CE262-67901

CE263-67901

Part number

CC493-67904

CC493-67905

Part number

ENWW Part numbers 427

Customer self repair (CSR) parts

Product name

Formatter assembly kit

HP postcard media insert replacement

Feed and separation roller kit (Trays 2–5)

Includes 1 each, feed and separation rollers

Secondary transfer (T2) roller kit

Tray 1 roller kit

Toner collection unit kit

Maintenance transfer kit

Includes ITB, transfer roller (T2), tray 1 pickup roller,

Trays 2-5 feed and separation rollers

Repair transfer kit

Includes ITB and transfer roller (T2)

110V fuser kit

220V fuser kit

Internal hard-disk drive kit

Fuser cleaning kit

Service manual

Product number

CE249A

CE246A

CE247A

Part number

CC493-69001

CC497-67902

CC493-67907

CC493-67908

CC493-67906

CC493-67913

CC493-67910

CC493-67909

CC493-67911

CC493-67912

CC493-67901

CC468-67919

CC489-90936

Service maintenance kits

Product name

Tray 1 separation pad

Trays 2-5 pickup roller Qty. 1

Table 4-1 Maintenance kits

Product name Product number

Fuser kit (110 V)

Fuser kit (220 V)

CE246A

CE247A

Transfer kit

Includes ITB, transfer roller

(T2), tray 1 pickup roller,

Trays 2-5 feed and separation rollers

CE249A

Part number

CC493-67911

CC493-67912

CC493-67910

Part number

RL1-1937-000CN

RL1-2099-000CN

Self-repair level

428 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Unique components

Use the following tables as a quick reference to identify component part numbers by product voltage, or function (simplex or duplex).

Table 4-2 110V and 220V unique components

Item Part number

Fuser kit, 110 V

Fuser kit, 220 V

Low-voltage power supply, 110 V

Low-voltage power supply, 220 V

CC493-67911

CC493-67912

RM1-5763-000CN

RM1-5764-000CN

Table 4-3 Simplex and duplex unique components

Item

Registration assembly kit, simplex

Registration assembly kit, duplex

Secondary transfer assembly kit, simplex

Secondary transfer assembly kit, duplex

Guide, paper feed, simplex

Duplexing guide assembly, duplex

Fuser drive assembly, simplex

Fuser drive assembly, duplex

Simplex delivery assembly kit

Duplex delivery assembly kit

Part number

CC493-67916

CC493-67917

CC492-67902

CC492-67901

RC2-4566-000CN

RM1-5531-000CN

RM1-6702-000CN

RM1-5656-000CN

CC493-67918

CC493-67919

ENWW Part numbers 429

Screws

NOTE: The screw illustrations in the following table are for reference only. Screws might vary in size and appearance from those shown in this table.

Table 4-4 Common fasteners

Example Description Size Part Number

Screw, with washer M3X8 XA9-1420-000CN

Screw, tapping, truss head M4X10 XB4-7401-005CN

Screw, tap

Screw, D

Screw, tooth washer

Screw, step

M3X6

M3X8

M4X6

Not applicable

XA9-1503-000CN

XA9-1671-000CN

XB2–7400-606CN

RC3-0912-000CN

430 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

How to use the parts lists and diagrams

The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the product and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a field replacement unit (FRU).

CAUTION: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical components, pay careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the description column. Doing so will ensure that the part number selected is for the correct all-in-one model.

NOTE: In this manual, the abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.”

Components described as a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors.

ENWW How to use the parts lists and diagrams 431

External covers, panels, and doors

Figure 4-1 External covers, panels, and doors

*A01 12

Front door assembly

See Figure 4-3

Right door assembly

See Figure 4-2

432 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-5 External covers, panels, and doors;

Ref

Description

Grip, left front

Grip, left rear

Cover, left upper

Cover, right front

Cover, right rear

Cover, upper

Cover, left lower

Cover, inner

Tray, face-down swing

Cover, left rear

Control-panel assembly

Face-down tray assembly

Right handle cover assembly

Rear cover assembly

Part number

RC2-4268-000CN

RC2-4269-000CN

RC2-4270-000CN

RC2-4272-000CN

RC2-4273-000CN

RC2-4276-000CN

RC2-4300-000CN

RM1-5520-000CN

RC2-4547-000CN

RC2-8213-000CN

RM1-5786-000CN

RM1-5494-000CN

RM1-5507-000CN

RM1-5508-000CN

Qty

ENWW External covers, panels, and doors 433

Right door assembly

Figure 4-2 Right door assembly

*A06 *A07

*A06

*A03

*A08

*A06

*A04

*A06

*A05

*A02

*A01

*A09

*A06

434 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-6 Right door assembly

Ref

Description

Right door assembly

Cover, M.P. crossmember R

Part number

RM1-5509-000CN

RC2-4747-000CN

Qty

ENWW Right door assembly 435

Front door assembly

Figure 4-3 Front door assembly

*A16

*A08

*A19

*A01

*A18

*A11

*A13

*A05

*A17

*A10

*A02

*A09

*A18

*A15

*A07

*A01

*A07

*A17

*A06

*A14

*A12

*A18

*A03

436 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-7 Front door assembly

Ref

Description

Front door assembly

Part number

RM1-5506-000CN

Qty

ENWW Front door assembly 437

Internal components

Internal components (1 of 7)

Figure 4-4 Internal components 1 of 7

(FM3)

(J62)

DUPLEX MODEL

SIMPLEX MODEL

(SR5)

(J48)

438 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-8 Internal components (1 of 7)

Ref

Description

Paper delivery fan assembly

Guide, paper feed, simplex

Duplexing guide assembly, duplex

Paper delivery fan duct assembly

Holder, cable

Rod, paper delivery fan

Spring, compression

Holder, right door handle

Photo interrupter, TLP1243

Part number

RM1-5501-000CN

RC2-4566-000CN

RM1-5531-000CN

RM1-5583-000CN

RC2-3997-000CN

RC2-4070-000CN

RU6-2310-000CN

RC2-4573-000CN

WG8-5696-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 439

Internal components (2 of 7)

Figure 4-5 Internal components 2 of 7

26 19

PCA

See Figure 4-18

(J68)

(J1)

(J2)

(J3)

(J4)

PCA

See Figure 4-18

*A01

440 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-9 Internal components (2 of 7)

Ref

Description

Bushing

Lever, CRG. lock

Tray, waste toner catch

Spring, torsion

Spring, grounding

Bushing

Lifter base assembly

Cover

Crg. Guide lower assembly

Shutter assembly

Shutter arm assembly

Part number

RC2-9719-000CN

RC2-3986-000CN

RC2-4218-000CN

RU6-2247-000CN

RC2-4469-000CN

RC2-4470-000CN

RM1-5913-000CN

RC2-4403-000CN

RC2-5962-000CN

RM1-5486-000CN

RM1-5488-000CN

RM1-5489-000CN

RM1-5585-000CN

RM1-5586-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 441

Internal components (3 of 7)

Figure 4-6 Internal components 3 of 7

(J60)

*A04

(J82)

(J66)

*A04

*A05

(SR7)

(J46)

*A01

Tray

See Figure 4-11

(SW5)

(J45)

25 8

(SW3)

(J84)

(SW2)

(FT1) (SW1)

(FT2)

*A03

*A02

442 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-10 Internal components (3 of 7)

Ref

Description

Hinge, front door

Cover

Lever, shutter

Spring, compression

Front inner cover upper assembly

Interlock assembly

Waste toner collection kit (includes instructions and wipe)

Waste toner duct assembly

Power switch assembly

Front inner cover lower assembly

Cassette rail right assembly

Cassette rail left assembly

Lever, crg. pressure, front

Spring, tension

Spring, grounding

Switch

Waste toner detect assembly

Waste toner paper feed assembly

High voltage holder assembly

Switch, push

Photo interrupter

Part number

RC2-4291-000CN

RC2-4292-000CN

RC2-4308-000CN

RC2-4415-000CN

RU6-2316-000CN

RM1-5495-000CN

RM1-5496-000CN

CC493-67913

RM1-5519-000CN

RM1-5582-000CN

RM1-5598-000CN

RM1-6195-000CN

RM1-6196-000CN

RC2-3983-020CN

RU6-2236-000CN

RU6-2237-000CN

WC4-5303-000CN

RM1-5545-000CN

RM1-5584-000CN

RM1-6694-000CN

WC2-5637-000CN

WG8-5696-000CN

Qty

Internal components 443

Internal components (4 of 7)

Figure 4-7 Internal components 4 of 7

(SR9)

(J19)

*A02

(J78)

Paper delivery assembly

See Figure 4-16

*A04

*A01

(J63)

(SR6)

(J47)

*A03

(FM2)

(J65)

*A05

Fuser assembly

See Figure 4-17

444 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-11 Internal components (4 of 7)

Ref

Description

Spring, tension

Cartridge fan assembly

Intermediate transfer belt kit (includes instructions, ITB, and T2 roller)

Photo interrupter

Part number

RU6-2235-000CN

RU6-2376-000CN

RM1-5499-000CN

Waste toner motor assembly RM1-5605-000CN

Laser scanner kit (includes instructions and one scanner assy.) CC493-67914

Position detect assembly

Front light guide assembly

RM1-5500-000CN

RM1-5492-000CN

CC493-67909

WG8-5696-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 445

Internal components (5 of 7)

Figure 4-8 Internal components 5 of 7

*A01

Right door assembly

See Figure 4-2

*A04

*A03

Paper pickup assembly

See Figure 4-12

*A03

*A02

(J83)

Secondary transfer assembly

See Figure 4-15

Registration assembly

See Figure 4-14

446 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-12 Internal components (5 of 7)

Ref

Description

Cover, inner

Shaft support (included in secondary transfer kit; see Figure 4–

15)

Spacer

Guide

Link, right door

Guide, cassette option

Holder, duct cable

Cassette guide assembly

Paper feed roller assembly

Density detect assembly

Cable cover assembly

Cover, roller

Cover, M.P. cross member

Arm, door link supporting, right

Part number

RC2-3981-000CN

RC2-4162-000CN

RC2-4514-000CN

RC2-4527-000CN

RC2-4726-000CN

RC2-4741-000CN

RC2-8239-000CN

RM1-5504-000CN

RM1-5525-000CN

RM1-5641-000CN

RM1-6695-000CN

RC2-4483-000CN

RC2-9189-000CN

RC2-4055-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 447

Internal components (6 of 7)

Figure 4-9 Internal components 6 of 7

DUPLEX MODEL

(M11)

(J39)

(SL2)

(J69)

*A02

(M2)

(J13)

15 (M2)

(J13)

DUPLEX MODEL

SIMPLEX MODEL

8 15

(M3),(J18)

(M4),(J17)

(M5),(J16)

(M6),(J15)

10B

*A03

10A

(M10)

(J38)

(M1)

(J14)

(M13)

(J37)

(FM4)

(J79)

*A01

448 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

10B

10A

Table 4-13 Internal components 6 of 7

Ref

Description

Duplexing drive assembly

Spring, tension

Cartridge fan

Flexible flat cable assembly (includes two FFC; DCC to laser/ scanner)

Main DC motor assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly

Main drive assembly kit (includes instructions)

ITB motor assembly

Developing disengaging motor

Fuser drive assembly, simplex

Fuser drive assembly, duplex

Lifter assembly

Flat flexible cable (DCC to HVPS lower)

Part number

RM1-5546-000CN

RU6-2468-000CN

RK2-2418-000CN

RM1-5498-000CN

RM1-5521-000CN

RM1-5549-000CN

CC493-67915

RM1-5777-000CN

RK2-2415-000CN

RM1-6702-000CN

RM1-5656-000CN

RM1-5914-000CN

RK2-2604-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 449

Internal components (7 of 7)

Figure 4-10 Internal components 7 of 7

(J128)

(J129)

(J60)

(J45)

(J19)

(J47)

(J201)

(J113)

PCA

See Figure 4-18

*A05

(J66)

(J68) (J82)

(J264)

(J81)

(J263)

(J36)

(J65)

(J67)

(J57)

(J56)

(J85)

(J106)

(J130)

(J145)

(J131)

(J148)

(J74)

(J83)

(J77)

(J64)

(J75)

(J52)

(J43)

*A01 (J147)

(J261) (J87) (J103)

(J115)

(J107)

(J81)

(J38)

(J112)

(J71) (J67)

(J72)

(J108)

(J251)

(J84)

(FT1) (FT2)

(J55DA)

(J55DB)

PCA

See Figure 4-18

*A05

(J58)

(J59)

(J202)

(J303)

(J39)

(J69)

(J99)

(J79) (J200)

(J116)

(J152)

(J603)

(J61)

PCA

See Figure 4-18

*A06

(J260)

(J37)

*A05

*A03

*A05

*A02

PCA

See Figure 4-18

*A04

(FM1)

(J153)

7 24

(SW6)

(J43)

24 11

450 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-14 Internal components 7 of 7

Ref

Description

Fan

Cable, flexible flat, H.V.T.

Contact assembly

Fan cable assembly

H.V. power supply cable assembly

Lower main cable assembly

Switch, push

Connecting cable assembly

Upper main cable assembly

Duplexing cable assembly, duplex

Feed cable assembly

Switch cable assembly

Connecting cable assembly

Control panel cable assembly

Sensor cable assembly

Interlock switch cable assembly

Part number

RK2-2577-000CN

RK2-2603-000CN

RM1-5502-000CN

RM1-5821-000CN

RM1-5724-000CN

RM1-5801-000CN

WC2-5637-000CN

RM1-5799-000CN

RM1-5800-000CN

RM1-5803-000CN

RM1-5804-000CN

RM1-5807-000CN

RM1-5811-000CN

RM1-5812-000CN

RM1-5814-000CN

RM1-5815-000CN

RM1-5816-000CN

Qty

Internal components 451

Cassettes 2-5

Figure 4-11 Cassettes 2-5

*A21

*A26

*A13

*A06

*A24

*A22 *A27

*A05

*A04

*A02

*A25 *A14

*A09

*A17

*A10

*A05

*A03

*A01

*A18

*A08

*A07

*A16

*A20

*A11

*A23

* A19

*A12

*A09

*A17

*A09

*A15

*A25

452 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-15 Cassette

Ref

Description

Cassette

Part number

RM1-5928-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 453

Paper pickup assembly

Figure 4-12 Paper pickup assembly

*A28

*A15

*A29

(J58)

*A30

*A32

*A36

*A33

*A03

*A09

*A02

*A07

*A11

*A10

*A08

*A13

*A12

*A04

*A06

*A15

(SL4)

(J59)

*A05

*A14

*A34

*A37

*A35

*A16

*A31

*A25

*A22

*A19

*A26

*A21

*A23

*A38

*A20

*A18

*A01

*A27

*A24

*A17

454 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-16 Paper pickup assembly

Ref

Description

Roller, paper pickup

Paper feed roller

Paper pickup assembly

Part number

RL1-2099-000CN

RM1-0037-020CN

RM1-5919-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 455

Tray 1 paper pickup assembly

Figure 4-13 Tray 1 paper pickup assembly

*A18

*A14

*A08

*A10

*A12

*A03

*A01

*A13

*A26

*A16

*A20

*A13

*A01

*A04

*A11

*A22

*A09

*A29

*A02

*A23

*A19

*A21 *A15

*A26

*A17

*A25

(SL3)

(J52)

*A33 *A27

*A05

*A06

*A30

*A32

(J75)

*A34

*A07

*A26 (SR8)

(J22)

*A24

(J22)

*A28

*A31

*A32

456 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-17 Tray 1 paper pickup assembly

Ref

Description

Pickup roller (Tray 1) kit (includes instructions)

Separation pad (Tray 1)

Part number

CC493–67906

RL1-1937-000CN

Qty

ENWW Internal components 457

Registration assembly

Figure 4-14 Registration assembly

*A46

*A09

*A08

*A09

*A08

*A19

*A06

*A38

*A10

*A21

*A18

*A14

*A11

*A43

*A29

*A42

*A35

*A23

*A44

*A15

*A12

*A04

*A15

*A45

*A25

*A39

*A30

*A26

*A38

*A05

*A42

*A03

*A32

*A02

*A01

*A40

*A37

*A16

*A05

*A42

*A34

SIMPLEX MODEL

(CL1)

(J53)

*A22

DUPLEX MODEL

*A42

*A17

*A35

*A20

*A02

*A31

*A03

*A42

*A44

*A42

*A05

*A24

*A42

*A05

*A27

*A28

*A07

*A36

*A33

(J23)

(J27)

(J53)

*A13

(J74)

(J77)

(J20)

(J21)

*A41

458 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-18 Registration assembly

Ref

Description

Registration assembly kit, simplex (includes instructions)

Registration assembly kit, duplex (includes instructions)

Part number

CC493-67916

CC493-67917

Qty

ENWW Internal components 459

Secondary transfer assembly

Figure 4-15 Secondary transfer assembly

*A02

*A10

*A11

*A19

*A09

*A19

*A01

*A13

*A12

*A07 *A20

*A05

*A03

*A16

*A18

*A14

*A21

*A17

*A15

*A08

DUPLEX MODEL

*A25

*A04

*A24

*A06

*A22

DUPLEX MODEL

*A23

*A26

DUPLEX MODEL

460 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-19 Secondary Transfer assembly

Ref

Description

Secondary transfer roller assembly kit (includes instructions)

Part number

CC493-67908

Secondary transfer assembly, duplex kit (includes shaft-support clip; # 3 Figure 4–8)

CC493-67901

Secondary transfer assembly, simplex kit (includes shaft-support clip; # 3 Figure 4–8)

CC493-67902

Qty

ENWW Internal components 461

Delivery assembly

Figure 4-16 Delivery assembly

*A29

*A28

*A10

*A16

*A03

*A07

*A23

*A07

*A23

*A16

*A11

*A02

*A27

*A19

*A17

*A26

DUPLEX MODEL

*A15

*A20

*A12

*A09

*A05

*A27

*A21

*A08

*A24

*A22

DUPLEX MODEL SR6

J47

*A30

*A04

*A01

*A26

*A13

*A25

*A27

*A06

*A18

*A14

462 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-20 Delivery assembly

Ref

Description

Simplex delivery assembly kit

Duplex delivery assembly kit

Part number

CC493-67918

CC493-67919

Qty

ENWW Internal components 463

Fuser assembly

Figure 4-17 Fuser assembly

464 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-21 Fuser assembly

Ref

Description

Fuser 110 V assembly kit (includes instructions)

Fuser 220 V assembly kit (includes instructions)

Part number

CC493-67911

CC493-67912

Qty

ENWW Internal components 465

PCAs

Figure 4-18 PCAs

7 9

466 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-22 PCAs

Ref

Description

DC controller PCA assembly

Low voltage power supply PCA assembly, 110V

Low voltage power supply PCA assembly, 220V

High voltage power supply PCA, lower (includes FFC; DCC to

HVPS lower)

High voltage power supply, upper

Inner connecting PCA assembly

Toner remain PCA assembly

Formatter kit (exchange; includes instructions)

Part number

RM1-5758-000CN

RM1-5763-000CN

RM1-5764-000CN

RM1-5779-000CN

RM1-5781-000CN

RM1-5636-020CN

RM1-5771-020CN

CC493-69001

Qty

ENWW Internal components 467

Assessories

Paper feeders

Figure 4-19 Paper feeders

1x500

Cassette 3

3x500

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

Cassette 5

468 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-23 Paper feeders

Ref

Description

Cassette

Part number

RM1-5928-000CN

Qty

ENWW Assessories 469

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors

Figure 4-20 Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors

*A02

5 *A04

*A01

1x500

*A01

1x500

*A05

*A02

3x500

*A01

*A03

*A01

10 *A01

470 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-24 Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors

Ref

Description

Cover, rear lower

Cover, rear

Cover, left

Cover, right front, 1x500

Cover, right front, 3x500

Cover, right rear

Cover, right center

Right door assembly 3x500

Right door assembly 1x500

Door, stock, 1x500

Part number

RC2-5378-000CN

RC2-5379-000CN

RC2-5393-000CN

RC2-5356-000CN

RC2-5357-000CN

RC2-5380-000CN

RC2-5394-000CN

RM1-5937-000CN

RM1-5936-000CN

RC2-5377-000CN

Qty

ENWW Assessories 471

1 X 500 paper feeder main body

Figure 4-21 1 X 500 paper feeder main body

*A16

*A28

*A24

*A29

*A26

*A20

*A28

*A16

*A04

*A11

*A14

*A13

*A32

*A16

*A05

*A12

(J15)

(J10)

(J410) (J409)

(J408)

(J17)

(J13)

(J11)

(J407)

(J15)

(J14)

(J18)

*A09

*A17

*A15

*A33

*A16

*A16 11

*A16

(M2)

(J14)

*A08

*A07

*A16

*A02

*A25

*A29

*A16

*A03

*A22

*A16

*A01

*A19

*A29

*A21

*A23

*A27

*A01

*A06

*A19

*A27

*A01

Cassette

See Figure 4-11

*A16

*A10

*A18 *A16

*A31

*A30

472 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-25 1 X 500 paper feeder main body

Ref

Description

Lifter base assembly

Lifter assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly, 1x500

Feeder PCA assembly, 1x500

Paper pickup assembly

Part number

RM1-5913-000CN

RM1-5914-000CN

RM1-5934-000CN

RM1-5854-000CN

RM1-5929-000CN

Qty

ENWW Assessories 473

3 X 500 paper feeder main body

Figure 4-22 3 X 500 paper feeder main body

*A08

*A23

*A08

*A15

*A02

*A09

*A19

*A17

*A08

*A15

*A03

*A12

*A11

*A26

*A10

(J15)

(J24)

(J34)

(J10)

(J410)

(J17)

(J408)

(J13)

(J409)

(J404)

(J407)

(J11)

(J15)

(J14)

(J18) (J19)

(J22) 8

(J406)

(J405)

(J25)

(J402)

(J24)

(J20)

(J21)

(J32)

(J31)

*A07

(J403)

*A16 (J35)

*A14

*A27

(J34)

(J30)

*A15

*A17

*A15 *A15

(M2)

(J14)

*A06

*A05

*A15

*A13

*A17

*A15

*A21

*A01

*A04

*A24

*A17

*A20

*A22

*A18

*A25

*A18

*A25 *A01

*A15

Cassette

See Figure 4-11

*A01

*A25

474 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

Table 4-26 3 X 500 paper feeder main body

Ref

Description

Lifter base assembly

Lifter assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly 3x500

Feeder PCA assembly 3x500

Paper pickup assembly

Part number

RM1-5913-000CN

RM1-5914-000CN

RM1-5935-000CN

RM1-5958-000CN

RM1-5929-000CN

Qty

ENWW Assessories 475

Alphabetical parts list

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list

Description

Arm, door link supporting, right

Bushing

Cable cover assembly

Cable, flexible flat, H.V.T.

Cartridge fan

Cartridge fan assembly

Cassette

Cassette guide assembly

Cassette rail left assembly

Cassette rail right assembly

Connecting cable assembly

Contact assembly

Control panel cable assembly

Control-panel assembly

Cover

476 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams

Part number

RC2-4055-000CN

RC2-9719-000CN

RC2-4470-000CN

RM1-6695-000CN

RK2-2603-000CN

RK2-2418-000CN

RM1-5499-000CN

RM1-5928-000CN

RM1-5504-000CN

RM1-6196-000CN

RM1-6195-000CN

RM1-5799-000CN

RM1-5811-000CN

RM1-5812-000CN

RM1-5502-000CN

RM1-5814-000CN

RM1-5786-000CN

RC2-4403-000CN

RC2-5962-000CN

RC2-4308-000CN

Table and page

Paper feeders on page 469

Cassette on page 453

ENWW

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Cover, inner

Cover, left

Cover, left lower

Cover, left rear

Cover, left upper

Cover, M.P. cross member

Cover, M.P. crossmember R

Cover, rear

Cover, rear lower

Cover, right center

Cover, right front

Cover, right front, 1x500

Cover, right front, 3x500

Cover, right rear

Cover, roller

Cover, upper

Crg. Guide lower assembly

DC controller PCA assembly

RC2-5378-000CN

RC2-5394-000CN

RC2-4272-000CN

RC2-5356-000CN

RC2-5357-000CN

RC2-4273-000CN

RC2-5380-000CN

RC2-4483-000CN

RC2-4276-000CN

RM1-5486-000CN

RM1-5758-000CN

Part number

RM1-5520-000CN

RC2-3981-000CN

RC2-5393-000CN

RC2-4300-000CN

RC2-8213-000CN

RC2-4270-000CN

RC2-9189-000CN

RC2-4747-000CN

RC2-5379-000CN

Table and page

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

Alphabetical parts list 477

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Density detect assembly

Developing disengaging motor

Door, stock, 1x500

Part number

RM1-5641-000CN

RK2-2415-000CN

RC2-5377-000CN

Duplex delivery assembly kit

Duplexing cable assembly, duplex

Duplexing drive assembly

Duplexing guide assembly, duplex

Face-down tray assembly

Fan

Fan cable assembly

Feed cable assembly

Feeder PCA assembly 3x500

Feeder PCA assembly, 1x500

CC493-67919

RM1-5803-000CN

RM1-5546-000CN

RM1-5531-000CN

RM1-5494-000CN

RK2-2577-000CN

RM1-5821-000CN

RM1-5804-000CN

RM1-5958-000CN

RM1-5854-000CN

Flat flexible cable (DCC to HVPS lower) RK2-2604-000CN

Flexible flat cable assembly (includes two FFC; DCC to laser/ scanner)

Formatter kit (exchange; includes instructions)

Front door assembly

RM1-5498-000CN

CC493-69001

RM1-5506-000CN

Front inner cover lower assembly

Front inner cover upper assembly

Front light guide assembly

Fuser 110 V assembly kit (includes instructions)

Fuser 220 V assembly kit (includes instructions)

Fuser drive assembly, duplex

RM1-5598-000CN

RM1-5495-000CN

RM1-5492-000CN

CC493-67911

CC493-67912

RM1-5656-000CN

Table and page

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

Delivery assembly on page 463

Front door assembly on page 437

Fuser assembly on page 465

478 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Fuser drive assembly, simplex

Grip, left front

Grip, left rear

Guide

Guide, cassette option

Part number

RM1-6702-000CN

RC2-4268-000CN

RC2-4269-000CN

RC2-4527-000CN

RC2-4741-000CN

Guide, paper feed, simplex

H.V. power supply cable assembly

RC2-4566-000CN

RM1-5724-000CN

High voltage holder assembly RM1-6694-000CN

High voltage power supply PCA, lower (includes FFC; DCC to

HVPS lower)

High voltage power supply, upper

Hinge, front door

RM1-5779-000CN

RM1-5781-000CN

RC2-4291-000CN

Hinge, front door RC2-4292-000CN

Holder, cable

Holder, duct cable

Holder, right door handle

Inner connecting PCA assembly

Interlock assembly

Interlock switch cable assembly

RC2-3997-000CN

RC2-8239-000CN

RC2-4573-000CN

RM1-5636-020CN

RM1-5496-000CN

RM1-5816-000CN

Intermediate transfer belt kit (includes instructions, ITB, and T2 roller)

ITB motor assembly

CC493-67909

RM1-5777-000CN

Laser scanner kit (includes instructions and one scanner assy.) CC493-67914

Lever, CRG. lock

Lever, crg. pressure, front

RC2-3986-000CN

RC2-3983-020CN

Table and page

Alphabetical parts list 479

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Lever, shutter

Lifter assembly

Lifter base assembly

Link, right door

Low voltage power supply PCA assembly, 110V

Low voltage power supply PCA assembly, 220V

Lower main cable assembly

Main DC motor assembly

Main drive assembly kit (includes instructions)

Paper delivery fan assembly

Paper delivery fan duct assembly

Paper feed roller

Paper feed roller assembly

Paper pickup assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly 3x500

Paper pickup drive assembly, 1x500

480 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams

Part number

RC2-4415-000CN

RM1-5914-000CN

RM1-5913-000CN

RC2-4726-000CN

RM1-5763-000CN

RM1-5764-000CN

RM1-5801-000CN

RM1-5521-000CN

CC493-67915

RM1-5501-000CN

RM1-5583-000CN

RM1-0037-020CN

RM1-5525-000CN

RM1-5919-000CN

RM1-5929-000CN

RM1-5549-000CN

RM1-5935-000CN

RM1-5934-000CN

Table and page

ENWW

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Photo interrupter

Photo interrupter, TLP1243

Pickup roller (Tray 1) kit (includes instructions)

Position detect assembly

Power switch assembly

Rear cover assembly

Registration assembly kit, duplex (includes instructions)

Registration assembly kit, simplex (includes instructions)

Right door assembly

Right door assembly 1x500

Right door assembly 3x500 RM1-5937-000CN

Right handle cover assembly

Rod, paper delivery fan

RM1-5507-000CN

RC2-4070-000CN

Roller, paper pickup RL1-2099-000CN

Secondary transfer assembly, duplex kit (includes shaft-support clip; # 3 Figure 4–8)

CC493-67901

Secondary transfer assembly, simplex kit (includes shaft-support clip; # 3 Figure 4–8)

CC493-67902

Secondary transfer roller assembly kit (includes instructions) CC493-67908

Sensor cable assembly RM1-5815-000CN

Separation pad (Tray 1) RL1-1937-000CN

Shaft support (included in secondary transfer kit; see Figure 4–

15)

RC2-4162-000CN

Part number

WG8-5696-000CN

CC493–67906

RM1-5500-000CN

RM1-5582-000CN

RM1-5508-000CN

CC493-67917

CC493-67916

RM1-5509-000CN

RM1-5936-000CN

Table and page

Registration assembly on page 459

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

Alphabetical parts list 481

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Shutter arm assembly

Shutter assembly

Simplex delivery assembly kit

Spacer

Spring, compression

Spring, grounding

Spring, tension

Spring, torsion

Switch

Switch cable assembly

Switch, push

Toner remain PCA assembly

Tray, face-down swing

Tray, waste toner catch

482 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams

Part number

RM1-5585-000CN

RM1-5586-000CN

RM1-5488-000CN

RM1-5489-000CN

CC493-67918

RC2-4514-000CN

RU6-2310-000CN

RU6-2316-000CN

RC2-4469-000CN

RU6-2237-000CN

RU6-2236-000CN

RU6-2235-000CN

RU6-2376-000CN

RU6-2468-000CN

RU6-2247-000CN

WC4-5303-000CN

RM1-5807-000CN

WC2-5637-000CN

RM1-5771-020CN

RC2-4547-000CN

RC2-4218-000CN

Table and page

Delivery assembly on page 463

ENWW

Table 4-27 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description

Upper main cable assembly

Waste toner collection kit (includes instructions and wipe)

Waste toner detect assembly

Waste toner duct assembly

Waste toner motor assembly

Waste toner paper feed assembly

Part number

RM1-5800-000CN

CC493-67913

RM1-5545-000CN

RM1-5519-000CN

RM1-5605-000CN

RM1-5584-000CN

Table and page

ENWW Alphabetical parts list 483

Numerical parts list

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list

Part number Description

CC493-67901

CC493-67902

CC493-67908

CC493-67909

CC493-67911

CC493-67912

CC493-67913

CC493-67914

CC493-67915

CC493-67916

CC493-67917

CC493-67918

CC493-67919

CC493-69001

CC493–67906

RC2-3981-000CN

RC2-3983-020CN

RC2-3986-000CN

RC2-3997-000CN

RC2-4055-000CN

RC2-4070-000CN

RC2-4162-000CN

Table and page

Secondary transfer assembly, duplex kit (includes shaft-support clip; # 3 Figure 4–8)

Secondary transfer assembly, simplex kit (includes shaft-support clip; # 3 Figure 4–8)

Secondary transfer roller assembly kit (includes instructions)

Intermediate transfer belt kit (includes instructions, ITB, and T2 roller)

Fuser 110 V assembly kit (includes instructions)

Fuser 220 V assembly kit (includes instructions)

Waste toner collection kit (includes instructions and wipe)

Fuser assembly on page 465

Laser scanner kit (includes instructions and one scanner assy.)

Main drive assembly kit (includes instructions)

Registration assembly on page 459

Registration assembly kit, simplex (includes instructions)

Registration assembly kit, duplex (includes instructions)

Simplex delivery assembly kit

Duplex delivery assembly kit

Formatter kit (exchange; includes instructions)

Pickup roller (Tray 1) kit (includes instructions)

Cover, inner

Lever, crg. pressure, front

Delivery assembly on page 463

Lever, CRG. lock

Holder, cable

Arm, door link supporting, right

Rod, paper delivery fan

Shaft support (included in secondary transfer kit; see Figure 4–

15)

484 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description

RC2-4218-000CN Tray, waste toner catch

RC2-4268-000CN

RC2-4269-000CN

RC2-4270-000CN

RC2-4272-000CN

RC2-4273-000CN

RC2-4276-000CN

RC2-4291-000CN

RC2-4292-000CN

RC2-4300-000CN

RC2-4308-000CN

RC2-4403-000CN

RC2-4415-000CN

RC2-4469-000CN

RC2-4470-000CN

RC2-4483-000CN

RC2-4514-000CN

RC2-4527-000CN

RC2-4547-000CN

RC2-4566-000CN

RC2-4573-000CN

RC2-4726-000CN

Grip, left front

Grip, left rear

Cover, left upper

Cover, right front

Cover, right rear

Cover, upper

Hinge, front door

Cover, left lower

Cover

Lever, shutter

Spring, grounding

Bushing

Cover, roller

Spacer

Guide

Tray, face-down swing

Guide, paper feed, simplex

Holder, right door handle

Link, right door

Table and page

Numerical parts list 485

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description

RC2-4741-000CN Guide, cassette option

RC2-4747-000CN

RC2-5356-000CN

Cover, M.P. crossmember R

Cover, right front, 1x500

RC2-5357-000CN

RC2-5377-000CN

RC2-5378-000CN

RC2-5379-000CN

RC2-5380-000CN

RC2-5393-000CN

RC2-5394-000CN

RC2-5962-000CN

RC2-8213-000CN

RC2-8239-000CN

RC2-9189-000CN

RC2-9719-000CN

RK2-2415-000CN

RK2-2418-000CN

RK2-2577-000CN

RK2-2603-000CN

Cover, right front, 3x500

Door, stock, 1x500

Cover, rear lower

Cover, rear

Cover, right rear

Cover, left

Cover, right center

Cover

Cover, left rear

Holder, duct cable

Cover, M.P. cross member

Bushing

Developing disengaging motor

Cartridge fan

Fan

Cable, flexible flat, H.V.T.

486 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams

Table and page

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

ENWW

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number

RK2-2604-000CN

RL1-1937-000CN

RL1-2099-000CN

RM1-0037-020CN

RM1-5486-000CN

RM1-5488-000CN

RM1-5489-000CN

RM1-5492-000CN

RM1-5494-000CN

RM1-5495-000CN

RM1-5496-000CN

RM1-5498-000CN

RM1-5499-000CN

RM1-5500-000CN

RM1-5501-000CN

RM1-5502-000CN

RM1-5504-000CN

RM1-5506-000CN

RM1-5507-000CN

RM1-5508-000CN

RM1-5509-000CN

RM1-5519-000CN

Description

Flat flexible cable (DCC to HVPS lower)

Separation pad (Tray 1)

Roller, paper pickup

Paper feed roller

Crg. Guide lower assembly

Shutter assembly

Front light guide assembly

Face-down tray assembly

Front inner cover upper assembly

Interlock assembly

Flexible flat cable assembly (includes two FFC; DCC to laser/ scanner)

Cartridge fan assembly

Position detect assembly

Paper delivery fan assembly

Contact assembly

Cassette guide assembly

Front door assembly

Right handle cover assembly

Rear cover assembly

Right door assembly

Waste toner duct assembly

Table and page

Front door assembly on page 437

Numerical parts list 487

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number

RM1-5520-000CN

RM1-5521-000CN

RM1-5525-000CN

RM1-5531-000CN

RM1-5545-000CN

RM1-5546-000CN

RM1-5549-000CN

RM1-5582-000CN

RM1-5583-000CN

RM1-5584-000CN

RM1-5585-000CN

RM1-5586-000CN

RM1-5598-000CN

RM1-5605-000CN

RM1-5636-020CN

RM1-5641-000CN

RM1-5656-000CN

RM1-5724-000CN

RM1-5758-000CN

RM1-5763-000CN

RM1-5764-000CN

RM1-5771-020CN

RM1-5777-000CN

RM1-5779-000CN

Description

Cover, inner

Main DC motor assembly

Paper feed roller assembly

Duplexing guide assembly, duplex

Waste toner detect assembly

Duplexing drive assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly

Power switch assembly

Paper delivery fan duct assembly

Waste toner paper feed assembly

Shutter arm assembly

Front inner cover lower assembly

Waste toner motor assembly

Inner connecting PCA assembly

Density detect assembly

Fuser drive assembly, duplex

H.V. power supply cable assembly

DC controller PCA assembly

Low voltage power supply PCA assembly, 110V

Low voltage power supply PCA assembly, 220V

Toner remain PCA assembly

ITB motor assembly

High voltage power supply PCA, lower (includes FFC; DCC to

HVPS lower)

Table and page

488 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams ENWW

ENWW

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description

RM1-5781-000CN

RM1-5786-000CN

High voltage power supply, upper

Control-panel assembly

RM1-5799-000CN

RM1-5800-000CN

RM1-5801-000CN

RM1-5803-000CN

RM1-5804-000CN

RM1-5807-000CN

RM1-5811-000CN

RM1-5812-000CN

RM1-5814-000CN

RM1-5815-000CN

RM1-5816-000CN

RM1-5821-000CN

RM1-5854-000CN

RM1-5913-000CN

RM1-5914-000CN

RM1-5919-000CN

RM1-5928-000CN

Connecting cable assembly

Upper main cable assembly

Lower main cable assembly

Duplexing cable assembly, duplex

Feed cable assembly

Switch cable assembly

Connecting cable assembly

Control panel cable assembly

Sensor cable assembly

Interlock switch cable assembly

Fan cable assembly

Feeder PCA assembly, 1x500

Lifter base assembly

Lifter assembly

Paper pickup assembly

Cassette

Table and page

Paper feeders on page 469

Cassette on page 453

Numerical parts list 489

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description

RM1-5928-000CN

RM1-5929-000CN

Cassette

Paper pickup assembly

RM1-5929-000CN

RM1-5934-000CN

RM1-5935-000CN

RM1-5936-000CN

Paper pickup assembly

Paper pickup drive assembly, 1x500

Paper pickup drive assembly 3x500

Right door assembly 1x500

RM1-5937-000CN

RM1-5958-000CN

RM1-6195-000CN

RM1-6196-000CN

RM1-6694-000CN

RM1-6695-000CN

RM1-6702-000CN

RU6-2235-000CN

RU6-2236-000CN

RU6-2237-000CN

RU6-2247-000CN

RU6-2310-000CN

RU6-2316-000CN

RU6-2376-000CN

RU6-2468-000CN

WC2-5637-000CN

Right door assembly 3x500

Feeder PCA assembly 3x500

Cassette rail right assembly

Cassette rail left assembly

High voltage holder assembly

Cable cover assembly

Fuser drive assembly, simplex

Spring, tension

Spring, grounding

Spring, torsion

Spring, compression

Spring, tension

Switch, push

490 Chapter 4 Parts and diagrams

Table and page

Paper feeder external covers, panels, and doors on page 471

ENWW

Table 4-28 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description

WC2-5637-000CN Switch, push

WC4-5303-000CN

WG8-5696-000CN

Switch

Photo interrupter, TLP1243

Photo interrupter

Table and page